mirror of
https://git.lyx.org/repos/lyx.git
synced 2024-12-19 12:20:27 +00:00
b0379b7a68
Norman Ramsey is now at Tufts, and URLs to his websites at previous
institutions are broken. The new link gives the same information as
the old links did (verified with web.archive.org).
(cherry picked from commit be91997227)
19068 lines
339 KiB
Plaintext
19068 lines
339 KiB
Plaintext
#LyX 2.1 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
|
||
\lyxformat 474
|
||
\begin_document
|
||
\begin_header
|
||
\textclass scrbook
|
||
\begin_preamble
|
||
% DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
|
||
%
|
||
% This preamble is designed to ensure that the manual prints
|
||
% out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
|
||
% parts of the manual may not print out as expected. If you
|
||
% have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
|
||
% the documentation team
|
||
% email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
|
||
|
||
% if pdflatex is used
|
||
\usepackage{ifpdf}
|
||
\ifpdf
|
||
|
||
% set fonts for nicer pdf view
|
||
\IfFileExists{lmodern.sty}
|
||
{\usepackage{lmodern}}{}
|
||
|
||
\fi % end if pdflatex is used
|
||
|
||
% the pages of the TOC are numbered roman
|
||
% and a PDF-bookmark for the TOC is added
|
||
\pagenumbering{roman}
|
||
\let\myTOC\tableofcontents
|
||
\renewcommand{\tableofcontents}{%
|
||
\pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
|
||
\myTOC
|
||
\cleardoublepage
|
||
\pagenumbering{arabic}}
|
||
|
||
% used for multi-column text
|
||
\usepackage{multicol}
|
||
|
||
% extra space for tables
|
||
\newcommand{\extratablespace}[1]{\noalign{\vskip#1}}
|
||
\end_preamble
|
||
\options fleqn,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,titlepage,captions=tableheading
|
||
\use_default_options false
|
||
\begin_modules
|
||
logicalmkup
|
||
theorems-ams
|
||
theorems-ams-extended
|
||
multicol
|
||
shapepar
|
||
\end_modules
|
||
\maintain_unincluded_children false
|
||
\begin_local_layout
|
||
Format 7
|
||
InsetLayout CharStyle:MenuItem
|
||
LyxType charstyle
|
||
LabelString menu
|
||
LatexType command
|
||
LatexName menuitem
|
||
Font
|
||
Family Sans
|
||
EndFont
|
||
Preamble
|
||
\newcommand*{\menuitem}[1]{{\sffamily #1}}
|
||
EndPreamble
|
||
End
|
||
\end_local_layout
|
||
\language polish
|
||
\language_package default
|
||
\inputencoding auto
|
||
\fontencoding global
|
||
\font_roman default
|
||
\font_sans default
|
||
\font_typewriter default
|
||
\font_math auto
|
||
\font_default_family default
|
||
\use_non_tex_fonts false
|
||
\font_sc false
|
||
\font_osf false
|
||
\font_sf_scale 100
|
||
\font_tt_scale 100
|
||
\graphics default
|
||
\default_output_format default
|
||
\output_sync 0
|
||
\bibtex_command default
|
||
\index_command default
|
||
\paperfontsize 12
|
||
\spacing single
|
||
\use_hyperref true
|
||
\pdf_title "LyX's Additional Features manual"
|
||
\pdf_author "LyX Team"
|
||
\pdf_subject "LyX's additional features documentation"
|
||
\pdf_keywords "LyX, Documentation, Additional"
|
||
\pdf_bookmarks true
|
||
\pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
|
||
\pdf_bookmarksopen false
|
||
\pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
|
||
\pdf_breaklinks false
|
||
\pdf_pdfborder false
|
||
\pdf_colorlinks true
|
||
\pdf_backref false
|
||
\pdf_pdfusetitle false
|
||
\pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
|
||
\papersize default
|
||
\use_geometry false
|
||
\use_package amsmath 1
|
||
\use_package amssymb 1
|
||
\use_package cancel 0
|
||
\use_package esint 0
|
||
\use_package mathdots 1
|
||
\use_package mathtools 0
|
||
\use_package mhchem 1
|
||
\use_package stackrel 0
|
||
\use_package stmaryrd 0
|
||
\use_package undertilde 0
|
||
\cite_engine basic
|
||
\cite_engine_type default
|
||
\biblio_style plain
|
||
\use_bibtopic false
|
||
\use_indices false
|
||
\paperorientation portrait
|
||
\suppress_date false
|
||
\justification true
|
||
\use_refstyle 0
|
||
\index Indeks
|
||
\shortcut idx
|
||
\color #008000
|
||
\end_index
|
||
\secnumdepth 3
|
||
\tocdepth 3
|
||
\paragraph_separation indent
|
||
\paragraph_indentation default
|
||
\quotes_language german
|
||
\papercolumns 1
|
||
\papersides 2
|
||
\paperpagestyle headings
|
||
\tracking_changes false
|
||
\output_changes false
|
||
\html_math_output 0
|
||
\html_css_as_file 0
|
||
\html_be_strict true
|
||
\end_header
|
||
|
||
\begin_body
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Title
|
||
LyX -- Zaawansowane możliwości
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Author
|
||
by the LyX Team
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\noindent
|
||
Opiekunem tego pliku jest aktualnie
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Mike Ressler
|
||
\noun default
|
||
.
|
||
Proszę wysyłać komentarze i poprawki błędów na podany adres.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
polskie tłumaczenie:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Tomasz Łuczak
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\noindent
|
||
Opiekunem wersji polskiej tego pliku jest aktualnie
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Tomasz Łuczak,
|
||
\noun default
|
||
tlu@technodat.com.pl.
|
||
Proszę wysyłać komentarze i poprawki błędów na podany adres.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
przy współpracy Pawła Dziekońskiego
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Date
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
today
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset toc
|
||
LatexCommand tableofcontents
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Chapter
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Podręcznik
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Zaawansowana Edycja
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, który właśnie czytasz jest właściwie drugą częścią
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręcznika Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
Powód podziału jest prosty:
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręcznik Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
jest już dość obszerny i zawiera opis wszystkich podstawowych funkcji,
|
||
które trzeba poznać do przygotowania większości dokumentów.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX Team ma długoterminowy cel tworzenia rozszerzeń LyX-a przez różne pliki
|
||
konfiguracyjne.
|
||
To oznacza, że jeśli chcesz obsługiwać pakiet LaTeX-a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Fizzwizzle
|
||
\family default
|
||
, to możesz utworzyć plik układu dla tego pakietu bez konieczności dokonywania
|
||
samodzielnie zmian w LyX-ie.
|
||
Już przyczyniliśmy się do powstania kilku nowych funkcji tą drogą.
|
||
Ten podręcznik, to jest miejsce, gdzie wszystko to udokumentowano.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ten podręcznik dokumentuje także kilka funkcji specjalnych, jak faksowanie,
|
||
kontrola wersji, obsługa SGML-u, które wymagają dodatkowego oprogramowania
|
||
do poprawnej pracy.
|
||
Ostatni rozdział traktuje o narzędziach i sposobach LaTeX-a, które można
|
||
zastosować do wykończenia Twoich dokumentów używając funkcji LaTeX-a.
|
||
Poza tym LyX jest tylko edytorem WYSIWYM i będzie zawsze tylko interfejsem
|
||
do pewnych funkcji LaTeX-a.
|
||
Oczywiście, z udokumentowanymi wszystkimi funkcjami.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli nie przeczytałeś jeszcze wprowadzenia, to właśnie czytasz niewłaściwy
|
||
podręcznik.
|
||
Wprowadzenie jest pierwszym miejscem, od którego powinieneś zacząć.
|
||
Opisuje on notację i format wszystkich podręczników.
|
||
Powinieneś gruntownie zaznajomić się z
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręcznikiem Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i wszystkimi podstawowymi funkcjami LyX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wiele rozdziałów w tym dokumencie jest niezależnymi artykułami napisanymi
|
||
przez pojedyncze osoby i są one odpowiednio zaznaczone.
|
||
Tymi osobami są generalnie ci, którzy napisali nowy plik układu (layout)
|
||
dla nowej klasy dokumentu lub pakietu LaTeX-a, lub zaimplementowali jakąś
|
||
funkcję.
|
||
Jeśli nie wspomniano o autorze w rozdziale lub sekcji to znaczy, że został
|
||
napisany przez LyX Documentation Team.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pierwszy rozdział stanowi suplement do narzędzi edycyjnych LyX-a, nie ujętych
|
||
w
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręczniku Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i przeznaczony jest dla bardziej zaawansowanych użytkowników.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wszystkie rozdziały tego podręcznika są w różnym stopniu, ale jednak, opisują
|
||
współpracę LyX-a i LaTeX-a, pierwszy rozdział opisuje wewnętrzną pracę
|
||
LyX-a, jak prosto LyX tworzy kod LaTeX-a jeśli chcesz.
|
||
To jest oczywiste dla wielu użytkowników LyX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Chapter
|
||
LyX i LaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Jak LyX używa LaTeX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
To jest rozdział dla TeX-ników i dla ciekawych LaTeX-a.
|
||
Wyjaśnimy w nim jak pracują LyX i LaTeX tworząc wynikowe dokumenty do druku.
|
||
Tylko w tym miejscu i tylko w tym podręczniku zakładamy Twoją znajomość
|
||
LaTeX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Od jakiegoś czasu LyX-a nazywamy ,,WYSIWYM frontendem do LaTeX'', ale to
|
||
nie jest dalej prawdą.
|
||
Istnieją również inne frontendy do LaTeX-a.
|
||
To są generalnie edytory potrafiące uruchomić LaTeX-a i zaznaczać błędy
|
||
podczas edycji.
|
||
Mimo że LyX
|
||
\emph on
|
||
jest
|
||
\emph default
|
||
edytorem i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
potrafi
|
||
\emph default
|
||
uruchomić LaTeX-a, i również zaznaczać błędy, i także wiele, wiele więcej.
|
||
Dzięki koncepcji WYSIWYM
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
What You See Is What You Mean -- dostajesz to o co Ci chodzi
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, nie musisz znać LaTeX-a aby efektywnie używać LyX-a.
|
||
LyX posiada także kilka rozszerzeń do LaTeX-a
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
The Team did this for parsing/coding reasons.
|
||
The new macros allow LyX to more easily produce LaTeX code and ensure that
|
||
the resulting code is correct.
|
||
Nothing that you, the user, need worry about.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Spróbuj kiedyś wybrać polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Eksportuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik
|
||
\family default
|
||
i spójrz na preambułę utworzonego pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Będziesz mógł zauważyć różne nowe makra zdefiniowane specjalnie przez LyX-a
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Trochę historii: kiedyś wszystkie makra znajdowały się w pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyx.sty
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Pewnego dnia The Team zdecydował, że utworzone pliki
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
powinny być bardziej przenośne.
|
||
Tak teraz makra są umieszczone w preambule.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Jednak to wszystko dzieje się przeźroczyście dla użytkownika.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Mamy kilka poleceń, które automatycznie wywołują LaTeX-a.
|
||
Oto one:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Podgląd\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
DVI
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Podgląd\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
PostScript/PDF
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Podgląd\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Aktualizuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
DVI
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Podgląd\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Aktualizuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Postscript/PDF
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Plik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Drukuj
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Tylko te polecenia wywołują LaTeX-a jeśli dokument się zmienił od czasu
|
||
ostatniego uruchomienia LaTeX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Podczas uruchomienia LaTeX-a podczas edycji pliku, LyX wykonuje następujące
|
||
czynności:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Konwertuje dokument
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
do LaTeX-a i zapisuje plik z rozszerzeniem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Uruchamia LaTeX-a z plikiem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
(być może kilka razy).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Jeśli są błędy , to zaznacza je w dokumencie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli uruchamiasz LaTeX-a poleceniem podglądu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
DVI
|
||
\family default
|
||
, LyX uruchamia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
xdvi
|
||
\family default
|
||
z plikiem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.dvi
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jeśli użyłeś polecenia podglądu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
PostScript
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
rukuj
|
||
\family default
|
||
, LyX wykonuje dwa kroki więcej:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Uruchamia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
dvips
|
||
\family default
|
||
do konwersji pliku Dvi do pliku postscriptowego:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Dla
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Podglądu
|
||
\family default
|
||
, plik wyjściowy ma rozszerzenie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.ps_tmp
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Dla
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
rukuj
|
||
\family default
|
||
, plik wyjściowy ma rozszerzenie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.ps
|
||
\family default
|
||
, jak można było się spodziewać.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Wywołuje
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ghostview
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub wysyła plik postscriptowy do drukarki.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
,,Pomocy! LyX utworzył nieczytelny plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
!''
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Użytkownicy LaTeX-a będą krzyczeć to przez całą noc, gdy deklaracje LyX-a
|
||
są nie do wykorzystania --- oni po prostu nie czytali dokumentacji do LyX-a
|
||
(RTFM!)
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Uwaga
|
||
\noun on
|
||
John Weiss
|
||
\noun default
|
||
: I know a certain faculty member who actually did complain to me that LyX
|
||
doesn't generate LaTeX files.
|
||
Ain't it funny how, sometimes, faculty are the worst at reading instructions?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Należy postawić sprawę jasno.
|
||
LyX produkuje dwa rodzaje plików LaTeX-owych.
|
||
Jedne są czytelne dla ludzi.
|
||
Inne są czytelne dla LyX-a.
|
||
Za każdym wywołaniem LaTeX-a przez LyX-a, tworzy on plik LaTeX-a, który
|
||
może być łatwo skanowany w celu poszukiwania błędów.
|
||
W rezultacie plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
nie jest czytelny dla ludzi.
|
||
Nie próbuj go czytać.
|
||
Jeśli chcesz mieć plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby móc wysłać go koledze, to wybierz polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Eksportuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Powtórzymy to jeszcze raz, specjalnie dla podkreślenia :
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.23cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
Jeśli chcesz plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
móc wysłać koledze, to wybierz polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Eksportuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.23cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Importowanie plików LaTeX-a do LyX-a
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:Importowanie-plików-LaTeX-a"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
You can import a LaTeX file into LyX by using the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
F
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ile\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
I
|
||
\bar default
|
||
mport\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
L
|
||
\bar default
|
||
aTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
command in LyX.
|
||
This will call a program named
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
tex2lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
---which will create a file
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
foo.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
from the file
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
foo.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
---and then open that file.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
\lang english
|
||
tex2lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
will translate most legal LaTeX, but not everything.
|
||
It will leave things it doesn't understand in TeX mode, so after translating
|
||
a file with
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
tex2lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
, you can look for red text and hand-edit it to look right.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
If you just want to put a piece of LaTeX code into a LyX file, see
|
||
\lang polish
|
||
sekcji
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:latexcodes"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Wstawianie poleceń LaTeX-a do dokumentów LyX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:latexcodes"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
To jest raczej ważny punkt: możesz zawsze wstawić kod LaTeX-a do dowolnego
|
||
dokumentu LyX-a.
|
||
LyX po prostu nie może i prawdopodobnie nigdy nie będzie mógł wyświetlić
|
||
wszystkich możliwych konstrukcji LaTeX.
|
||
Jeśli potrzebujesz wstawić polecenie LaTeX-a do dokumentu LyX-a, to użyj
|
||
wstawki ERT, którą możesz wstawić do dokumentu poleceniem
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
T
|
||
\bar default
|
||
eX
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Wstawka ERT może występować w trzech formach:
|
||
\family sans
|
||
collapsed
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
open
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
inlined
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Pierwsze dwie formy są podobne do innych rozwijalnych wstawek (takich jak
|
||
np.
|
||
wstawka przypisu) i są wygodne do zaznaczenia poleceń LaTeX-a.
|
||
Forma
|
||
\family sans
|
||
inlined
|
||
\family default
|
||
wstawki wyświetla jej zawartość, co jest wygodne dla krótkich fragmentów
|
||
kodu LaTeX-a.
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
% tak jak ten
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz przełączać się pomiędzy tymi formami przez kliknięcie prawym klawiszem
|
||
myszy na wstawce.
|
||
Uwaga jeśli chcesz więcej niż jeden wiersz poleceń LaTeX-a, to nie możesz
|
||
korzystać z trybu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
inlined
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Tutaj jest przykład wstawienia poleceń LaTeX-a w dokumencie LyX-a.
|
||
Oto kod:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{tabular}{ll}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{minipage}{5cm}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
This is an example for a minipage environment.
|
||
You
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
can put nearly everything in it, even (non-floating)
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
figures and tables.
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{minipage}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
&
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{minipage}{5cm}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{verbatim}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{minipage}{5cm}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
This ...
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{minipage}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{verbatim}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{minipage}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{tabular}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wstawka ERT zawierająca powyższy tekst jest umieszczona bezpośrednio po
|
||
tym akapicie.
|
||
Jeśli czytasz ten podręcznik w LyX-ie, to zobaczysz tylko przycisk z czerwonym
|
||
tekstem.
|
||
Czytając drukowaną wersję tego podręcznika zobaczysz rezultaty:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{tabular}{ll}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{minipage}{5cm}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
This is an example for a minipage environment.
|
||
You can put nearly everything in it, even (non-floating) figures and tables.
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{minipage}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
&
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{minipage}{5cm}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{verbatim}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{minipage}{5cm}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
This ...
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{minipage}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{verbatim}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{minipage}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{tabular}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ponadto możesz utworzyć oddzielny plik zawierający skomplikowaną strukturę
|
||
LaTeX-a i dołączyć go poleceniem
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ołącz plik
|
||
\family default
|
||
(powinieneś wybrać opcję
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
Zalecamy abyś dołączał pliki
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
, o których
|
||
\emph on
|
||
wiesz
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, że są poprawne.
|
||
W innym wypadku będziesz miał sporo zajęcia z wyszukiwaniem błędów\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Kilka ostatnich uwag o wyróżnieniu:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Wewnątrz LyX-a, kod LaTeX-a pojawia się
|
||
\emph on
|
||
na czerwono
|
||
\emph default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
LyX
|
||
\emph on
|
||
nie
|
||
\emph default
|
||
sprawdza poprawności Twojego kodu LaTeX-owego,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Staraj się nie odkrywać koła na nowo.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Na koniec dwie uwagi.
|
||
Po pierwsze, LyX posiada niewiele funkcji całkowicie wbudowanych ale będzie
|
||
więcej.
|
||
Bądź pewien, sprawdzając podręcznik, że danej funkcji LyX nie posiada zanim
|
||
zaczniesz kodować ją w LaTeX-u
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Uwaga od
|
||
\noun on
|
||
John Weiss
|
||
\noun default
|
||
-a: I seem to do this an awful lot.
|
||
Sat down and merrily began coding something to print out labels, only to
|
||
learn that there were already 2 different LaTeX packages to do this.
|
||
Worse yet - I had them already!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Po drugie istnieje wiele pakietów LaTeX-a począwszy od składu etykiet czy
|
||
kopert do ładnych wielostronicowych tabel.
|
||
Przejrzyj archiwum CTAN aby poznać więcej szczegółów.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli potrzebujesz zrobić trochę dzikich i ładnych rzeczy wewnątrz dokumentu,
|
||
bądź pewien swoich konstrukcji korzystając z dobrej książki o LaTeX-u.
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pewna liczba poleceń LaTeX-a musi być umieszczona przed początkiem tekstu.
|
||
Powinny one zostać umieszczone w preambule co opisano w następnej sekcji.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Preambuła LyX-a i LaTeX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
O preambule LaTeX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli już znasz LaTeX-a, to nie potrzebujesz tutaj wyjaśnienia do czego
|
||
służy preambuła.
|
||
Jeśli nie wiesz, to dajemy Ci kilka porad -- zalecamy abyś znów zapoznał
|
||
się z książką o LaTeX-u aby poznać więcej informacji.
|
||
W innym przypadku powinieneś czytać poniższe sekcje, ponieważ w nich jest
|
||
wyjaśnione co możesz zrobić i czego nie musisz zrobić w preambule LyX-owego
|
||
dokumentu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Preambuła LaTeX-a znajduje się na samym początku dokumentu
|
||
\emph on
|
||
przed
|
||
\emph default
|
||
jego treścią.
|
||
Służy ona do:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
deklaracji klasy dokumentu.
|
||
LyX już wykonuje to za Ciebie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli jesteś LaTeX-nikiem i masz już trochę dopasowanych klas dokumentów,
|
||
których chcesz używać, to zajrzyj do podręcznika
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Konfiguracja
|
||
\emph default
|
||
aby dowiedzieć się jak wykonać do nich interfejs.
|
||
Nie zapomnij wysłać swoich osiągnięć do LyX Team-u aby je włączyć do przyszłych
|
||
wersji!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
deklaracji używanych pakietów.
|
||
Pakiety LaTeX-a dostarczają specjalne polecenia, które są dostępne w dokumencie
|
||
tylko jeśli zadeklarujemy pakiet w preambule.
|
||
Na przykład, pakiet
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
indentfirst
|
||
\family default
|
||
wymusza wcinanie wszystkich akapitów.
|
||
istnieją pakiety dla etykiet, kopert, marginesów itd.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
ustawiania liczników, zmiennych, długości i szerokości.
|
||
Istnieje kilka liczników LaTeX-a i zmiennych, które
|
||
\emph on
|
||
muszą
|
||
\emph default
|
||
być ustawione globalnie z poziomu preambuły, aby uzyskać żądany efekt [istnieją
|
||
inne zmienne, które można ustawiać także wewnątrz dokumentu].
|
||
Marginesy są dobrym przykładem czegoś co musi być ustawione w preambule.
|
||
Innym przykładem jest format nalepek na listy.
|
||
Możesz ustawić je gdziekolwiek, ale najlepszym miejscem do tego jest preambuła.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
deklaracji definiowanych przez użytkownika poleceń [za pomocą polecenia
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
newcommand
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand
|
||
\family default
|
||
], głównie skrótów dla poleceń LaTeX-a, które występują często w tekście
|
||
dokumentu.
|
||
Mimo to preambuła jest dobrym miejscem na deklaracje poleceń, które
|
||
\emph on
|
||
mogą
|
||
\emph default
|
||
być deklarowane gdziekolwiek indziej [byleby
|
||
\emph on
|
||
przed
|
||
\emph default
|
||
ich pierwszym użyciem w tekście].
|
||
To może być użyteczne jeśli mamy wiele kodu LaTeX-a w dokumencie, który
|
||
normalnie nie powinien się zdarzyć.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX dodaje do preambuły własne definicje podczas tworzenia pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
To czyni dokumenty LaTeX-a utworzone przez LyX-a przenośnymi.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Zmiana preambuły
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenia, które dodaje LyX do preambuły są zafiksowane i nie możesz ich
|
||
zmienić bez samodzielnego patchowania LyX-a.
|
||
Możesz jednak dodać własne rzeczy do preambuły.
|
||
Możesz to zrobić na dwa sposoby:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Wybierz polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
reambuła
|
||
\family default
|
||
z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
F
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ormatowanie
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Otworzy się wówczas okno, w którym możesz wpisać swoje polecenia.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Edytor preambuły jest prymitywny, nie spodziewaj się po nim zbyt wiele.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Utwórz w swoim domyślnym szablonie dokumentu odpowiednie wpisy w preambule.
|
||
Wówczas tworząc nowy dokument na jego podstawie preambuła będzie już wpisana.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX nie dodaje niczego do Twojej części preambuły.
|
||
Zanim dodasz deklaracje do preambuły powinieneś upewnić się, że nie jest
|
||
już to wykonane przez LyX-a [czy pamiętasz co mówiliśmy o ponownym wynalezieniu
|
||
koła?].
|
||
Ponadto
|
||
\emph on
|
||
dokonuj poprawnych wpisów w preambule
|
||
\emph default
|
||
-- LyX nie sprawdza jej poprawności.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Przykłady
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Tutaj znajduje się kilka przykładów co można dodać do preambuły:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Przykład #1: Przesunięcie strony
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Istnieją dwie zmienne LaTeX-a do sterowania pozycją strony:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
hoffset
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
voffset
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Ich nazwy są samoobjaśniające.
|
||
Te zmienne są użyteczne jeśli w tej chwili o etykietach.
|
||
Czasami rozmiar medium i obszar medium, na którym będziesz drukować nie
|
||
pokrywają się.
|
||
Wówczas mamy polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
hoffset
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
voffset
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Domyślną wartością dla
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
hoffset
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
voffset
|
||
\family default
|
||
jest 0 pt, czyli strona nie jest przesunięta.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Niestety, niektóre sterowniki DVI wydają się zawsze przesuwać stronę.
|
||
Nie mamy pomysłu dlaczego lub dlaczego Twój administrator nie poprawił
|
||
tego.
|
||
Jeśli używasz LyX-a w systemie, którego osobiście nie nadzorujesz, a którego
|
||
administrator to ,,doofus'', to polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
hoffset
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
voffset
|
||
\family default
|
||
mogą zaoszczędzić Ci dni.
|
||
Na przykład Twoje marginesy lewy i górny są zawsze o pół cala zbyt duże.
|
||
Należy wówczas dodać do preambuły następujące polecenia:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
hoffset}{-0.5 in}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
voffset}{-0.5 in}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
a Twoje marginesy będą teraz poprawne.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Przykład #2: Etykiety
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Mówiąc etykiety mamy na myśli wydruk etykiet z adresami.
|
||
Istnieje miły pakiet, dostępny w najbliższym Ci archiwum CTAN, do wydruku
|
||
etykiet o nazwie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
labels.sty
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Twój system może nie mieć go domyślnie zainstalowanego -- zostawiamy Ci
|
||
to do sprawdzenia.
|
||
Pewnie będziesz chciał przeczytać dokumentację pakietu -- my nie zrobimy
|
||
tego za Ciebie.
|
||
Jednak poniższym przykładem podpowiadamy Ci jak z niego skorzystać.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Po pierwsze wybierz klasę dokumentu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
article
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Następnie wpisz do preambuły następujące deklaracje:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{labels}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
LabelCols=3
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
LabelRows=7
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
LeftBorder=8mm
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
RightBorder=8mm
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
TopBorder=9mm
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
BottomBorder=2mm
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Te ustawienia są odpowiednie dla arkusza etykiet Avery, nr #5360.
|
||
Teraz jesteś gotów do wydruku etykiet, ale potrzeba jeszcze wstawić polecenia
|
||
LaTeX umieszczając polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{labels}
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{labels}
|
||
\family default
|
||
wokół każdego tekstu z treścią etykiety.
|
||
Ta i inne funkcje pakietu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
labels.sty
|
||
\family default
|
||
są wyjaśnione w dokumentacji.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Być może, że kiedyś, ktoś napisze plik układu LyX-a do obsługi tego pakietu
|
||
wprost.
|
||
Być może to będziesz Ty.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Przykład #3: Wcięcie akapitu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Amerykanie są wyćwiczeni we wcinaniu pierwszego wiersza
|
||
\emph on
|
||
każdego
|
||
\emph default
|
||
akapitu.
|
||
Tak jak wszystkie inne dziwne quirks, większość Amerykanów będzie wyć i
|
||
jęczeć dopóki nie będą mieli wcinanych pierwszych wierszy we wszystkich
|
||
akapitach
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Uwaga od
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Johna Weiss'a
|
||
\noun default
|
||
: To było napisane przez Amerykanina -- przeze
|
||
\emph on
|
||
mnie
|
||
\emph default
|
||
! Tak postrzegam moich rodaków.
|
||
Nieprzerwanie ja nie lubię tego.
|
||
Thpbpbpbpbpbpbpbp!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
Polacy również.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Oczywiście takie zachowanie nie jest standardem w typografii.
|
||
W książkach wcinana jest tylko pierwszy wiersz akapitu jeśli ten akapit
|
||
występuje po poprzednim akapicie.
|
||
Ideą wcinania pierwszego wiersza akapitu jest wyróżnienie sąsiadujących
|
||
akapitów.
|
||
Jeśli jednak nie ma poprzedniego akapitu, np.
|
||
pod rysunkiem lub na początku rozdziału czy sekcji, pierwszy akapit nie
|
||
będzie wyróżniony wcięciem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli jesteś amerykaninem, to nie przejmuj się takimi ezoterycznymi rzeczami,
|
||
po prostu chcesz mieć wcięcia! Dodaj to do preambuły
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
Klasy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
mwart
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
mwbk
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
mwrep
|
||
\family default
|
||
autorstwa
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Marcina Wolińskiego
|
||
\noun default
|
||
automatycznie wcinają wszystkie akapity.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{indentfirst}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli Twoja dystrybucja TeX-a nie jest podła, to będziesz miał ten pakiet
|
||
zainstalowany i wszystkie akapity będą wcinane tak jak na to zasługują.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Przykład #4: Ten dokument
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz także sprawdzić jaką preambułę posiada ten dokument, aby poznać jakie
|
||
zaawansowane rzeczy możesz zrobić.
|
||
Ponadto więcej przykładów co można wpisać do preambuły znajdziesz w tym
|
||
podręczniku.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Błędy LyX-a i LaTeX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Gdy LyX wywołuje LaTeX-a, informuje go aby ignorował wszelkie błędy i przetwarza
|
||
ł dalej.
|
||
Można to wykorzystać do przejrzenia logu przebiegu LaTeX i wykonania post-morte
|
||
m czynności.
|
||
Jak wspomnieliśmy wcześniej, LyX tworzy dwa rodzaje plików
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
, jeden z nich jest używany do lokalizacji błędów w dokumencie.
|
||
Jeśli pojawi się błąd, to LyX umieści prostokąt ze słowem ,,Błąd'' w odpowiedni
|
||
m miejscu w dokumencie
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
LyX okazjonalnie nie odgadnie miejsca, w którym zdarzył się błąd.
|
||
To się zdarza zwykle przy tabelach, rysunkach, matematyce i preambule.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Zostanie także wyświetlony komunikat informujący o fakcie wystąpienia błędów
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz nawigować pomiędzy błędami za pomocą polecenia
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Błąd
|
||
\family default
|
||
z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
N
|
||
\bar default
|
||
awigacja
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Możesz ,,otwierać'' znaczniki błędów i podejrzeć komunikaty LaTeX-a przez
|
||
kliknięcie na znaczniku.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wiele osób lubi zobaczyć wprost cały log, który jest dostępny z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
odgląd\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
K
|
||
\bar default
|
||
omunikaty LaTeX-a
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Istniej kilka powszechnych komunikatów błędów i ostrzeżeń.
|
||
Wyjaśnimy je tutaj.
|
||
Powinieneś zajrzeć do dobrej książki o LaTeX-u dla zapoznania się z pełną
|
||
listą.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
LaTeX Warning:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Komunikat zaczynające się tymi słowy jest komunikatem diagnostycznym LaTeX-a.
|
||
Otrzymasz podobne ostrzeżenie gdy dodasz lub zmienisz odnośnik lub wpis
|
||
bibliografii, wówczas LaTeX komunikuje Ci, że powinien zostać uruchomiony
|
||
jeszcze raz.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ostrzeżenie można w większości zignorować.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
LaTeX Font Warning:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Inny komunikat ostrzegawczy, tym razem o fontach, których LaTeX nie potrafił
|
||
znaleźć.
|
||
Reszta komunikatu często informuje jakich fontów użył LaTeX w zastępstwie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz go bezpiecznie zignorować.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Overfull
|
||
\backslash
|
||
hbox
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LaTeX absolutnie
|
||
\emph on
|
||
uwielbia
|
||
\emph default
|
||
dawać takie komunikaty.
|
||
Ostrzeżenia dotyczą wierszy, które są zbyt długie i wystają poza prawy
|
||
margines.
|
||
Prawie zawsze jest to niezauważalne na wydruku.
|
||
Albo jeden lub dwa znaki przekraczają prawy margines.
|
||
LaTeX zdaje się generować co najmniej jeden taki komunikat dla dowolnego
|
||
dokumentu jaki napiszesz.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz ignorować te głupie komunikaty.
|
||
Zobaczysz na własne oczy jeśli coś będzie zbyt szerokie, spójrz na wynik
|
||
przetwarzania.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Underfull
|
||
\backslash
|
||
hbox
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LaTeX komunikuje nam, że zbyt małe wypełnienie wiersza zmusza go do wstawienia
|
||
zbyt dużych odstępów między wyrazami.
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz go także zignorować.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Overfull
|
||
\backslash
|
||
vbox
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Underfull
|
||
\backslash
|
||
vbox
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ostrzeżenie o kłopotach z łamaniem stron -- zbyt małych lub zbyt dużych
|
||
odstępach pionowych.
|
||
Jeszcze raz spójrz na wynik przetwarzania.
|
||
Zobaczysz na własne oczy jeśli coś będzie zbyt szerokie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
LaTeX Error: File
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes els
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Xxxx
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes ers
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
not found
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Plik ,,Xxxx'' nie jest zainstalowany w systemie.
|
||
Ten komunikat pojawia się często, gdy nie zainstalowałeś pakietów użytych
|
||
w dokumencie.
|
||
Jeśli nie dotykałeś preambuły lub nie używałeś polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
, to znaczy że brakuje jednego z pakietów, które próbuje załadować LyX.
|
||
Użyj polecenia
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
omoc\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
K
|
||
\bar default
|
||
onfiguracja LaTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby zobaczyć listę pakietów znanych LyX-owi.
|
||
Ten plik jest uaktualniany podczas każdej rekonfiguracji LyX-a (polecenie
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
E
|
||
\bar default
|
||
dycja
|
||
\bar under
|
||
\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
R
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ekonfiguruj
|
||
\family default
|
||
) i zawiera informacje, które pakiety zostały wykryte i do czego służą.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli
|
||
\emph on
|
||
użyłeś
|
||
\emph default
|
||
polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
i pakiet nie został zainstalowany, to należy zainstalować go samodzielnie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
LaTeX Error: Unknown option
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Błąd pojawia się gdy podano niezdefiniowaną (lub błędną) opcję użytego pakietu.
|
||
Sprawdź dokumentację do pakietu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Undefined control sequence
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli wstawiłeś polecenie LaTeX w dokumencie, ale popełniłeś np.
|
||
błąd literowy, to otrzymasz taki właśnie komunikat błędu.
|
||
Być może zapomniałeś załadować jakiś pakiet.
|
||
W ogólnym przypadku, komunikat błędu zwykle oznacza, że użyłeś niezdefiniowaneg
|
||
o polecenia.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Istnieją jeszcze inne komunikaty błędów i ostrzeżeń, a wiele z nich jest
|
||
samoobjaśniających.
|
||
Podane są częstymi komunikatami.
|
||
Inne są naprawdę zaszyfrowane.
|
||
To są aktualne komunikaty TeX-a i my na prawdę nie mamy klucza jak je odszyfrow
|
||
ać.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Oto ogólny tok postępowania jeśli zdarzy się błąd:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Sprawdź poprawność poleceń LaTeX-a wstawionych w dokumencie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Jeśli nie ma błędów literowych, to sprawdź poprawność ich użycia.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Jeśli dostaniesz pęk znaczników błędów na samym początku dokumentu, to znaczy,
|
||
że jest jakiś błąd w preambule.
|
||
Zacznij debugować swoją preambułę.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Jeśli nie dodałeś niczego do preambuły i nie wstawiłeś żadnych poleceń LaTeX-a
|
||
do dokumentu, to najpierw sprawdź swoją dystrybucję LaTeX.
|
||
Sprawdź brakujące pakiety i zainstaluj je.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
OK, nie brakuje pakietów.
|
||
Czy nie użyłeś jakieś opcji dopasowującej w LyX-ie? Precyzując, czy nie
|
||
użyłeś jej niewłaściwie, jak próba ręcznego wstawienia wielu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Protected Blank
|
||
\family default
|
||
s,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Linebreak
|
||
\family default
|
||
s czy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Pagebreak
|
||
\family default
|
||
s? Czy próbowałeś to kludge coś razem z nimi zamiast użyć odpowiednich środowisk
|
||
akapitów?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
OK, nie użyłeś żadnej opcji dopasowującej, postępujesz zgodnie z zasadami.
|
||
Czy próbowałeś przeprowadzić jakiś fantastyczny manewr? Czy zrobiłeś coś
|
||
wspaniałego w tabeli czy równaniu, jak wstawienie grafiki do komórki tabeli?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Czy nie masz zbyt długich akapitów tekstu gdzie LaTeX nie może znaleźć miejsca
|
||
na przełamanie wiersza? Domyślnie LaTeX jest dokładny w dodawaniu ekstra
|
||
odstępów między wyrazami aby przełamać wiersz.
|
||
Proponowane jest przerobienie akapitów aby usunąć ten problem.
|
||
Jeśli to nie jest możliwe, możesz objąć swój tekst w
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
sloppypar
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby obniżyć wymagania LaTeX-a przy łamaniu wierszy.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Czy nie przesadziłeś z zagnieżdżaniem? LyX [aktualnie] nie sprawdza czy
|
||
nie przekroczyłeś limitu zagnieżdżenia środowiska.
|
||
Jeśli zagnieździłeś środowiska aż do 17 poziomu, to może być problem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Nie otrzymałeś żadnych komunikatów błędów ale wynik źle wygląda.
|
||
Jeśli masz tabelę lub rysunek szerszy lub dłuższy od strony, to powinieneś:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
przeskalować rysunek do odpowiednich wymiarów,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
skrócić tabelę, tak aby pasowała.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli dalej jest źle z wynikiem i nie próbowałeś przeprowadzić żadnych wspaniały
|
||
ch lub kludge opcji dopasowujących, to my nie wiemy co jest nie tak.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli to nie pomoże, to
|
||
\emph on
|
||
prawdopodobnie
|
||
\emph default
|
||
znalazłeś błąd w LyX-ie\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Chapter
|
||
Dodatkowe narzędzia składu dokumentu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Przygotowanie bibliografii za pomocą BibTeX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Mike Ressler
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Ressler is to blame for all of Chapter 1 except where noted.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
STOP! jeśli wiesz czym jest BibTeX lub masz dobry pomysł na jego zastosowanie
|
||
(np.
|
||
ułożenie swojej własnej bazy bibliograficznej) nie idź, a biegnij do swojego
|
||
egzemplarza drugiego wydania Lamporta
|
||
\emph on
|
||
LaTeX: A Document Preparation System
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, zwłaszcza
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Dodatek B
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
W dalszej dyskusji zakładamy, że masz utworzony poprawny plik bibliografii
|
||
oraz masz poprawnie ustawione wszystkie odpowiednie zmienne środowiska
|
||
(np.
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
BIBINPUTS
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
BSTINPUTS
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
TEXINPUTS
|
||
\family default
|
||
) oraz jeśli jesteś odpowiednio zdesperowany powinieneś utworzyć plik LaTeX-a
|
||
,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' z bazą BibTeX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dla tych, którzy nie znają BibTeX-a, jest to system do tworzenia wielkich
|
||
baz Twoich często używanych odnośników do literatury.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dla wszystkich przyszłych artykułów, zapisz tylko potrzebne pozycje literatury
|
||
do wstawienia do bazy i oznacz odpowiednim kluczem każdy odnośnik.
|
||
Nawet jeśli piszesz tylko kilka dokumentów z kilkoma odnośnikami w każdym,
|
||
to warto poświęcić Twój czas na sprawdzenie BibTeX-a i zdecydować czy będzie
|
||
użyteczny dla Ciebie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Aby używać BibTeX-a w LyX-ie należy najpierw zapoznać się
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręcznikiem Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, w którym opisano sposób wstawiania cytowań.
|
||
Podstawowy mechanizm wstawiania odnośników BibTeX-a jest taki sam.
|
||
Umieść kursor na końcu dokumentu i wybierz
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
S
|
||
\bar default
|
||
pisy\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
C
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ytowanie
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
W otwartym oknie dialogowym wypełnij dwa pola:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Baza
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Danych podaj nazwę pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.bib
|
||
\family default
|
||
ale BEZ rozszerzenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.bib
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Dla wyszukiwania w wielu plikach
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.bib
|
||
\family default
|
||
należy podać ich nazwy rozdzielając je przecinkiem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Styl podaj nazwę pliku stylu BibTeX-a BEZ rozszerzenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.bst
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Domyślnym stylem jest
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
plain
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Dostępne są również style zgodne z polskimi zwyczajami typograficznymi o
|
||
nazwach:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
plabbrv
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
plalpha
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
plplain
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
plunsrt
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
(który powinien być dołączony do Twojej dystrybucji LaTeX-a, tak że nie
|
||
musisz przejmować się utworzeniem go).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zakładamy, że dla każdego cytowania źródło znajduje się w pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.bib
|
||
\family default
|
||
, wywołujemy polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
C
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ytowanie
|
||
\family default
|
||
w odpowiednim miejscu w tekście i wybierz z listy właściwy klucz odnośnika.
|
||
Nie potrzeba nic więcej; gdy wywołujemy na przykład polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
odgląd\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
VI
|
||
\family default
|
||
, powinieneś zobaczyć że BibTeX i LaTeX są wywoływane gdy zachodzi potrzeba,
|
||
włączając wielokrotne wywołanie LaTeX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Tworzenie indeksu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dobry indeks jest jedną z najtrudniejszych rzeczy do zrobienia w długim
|
||
dokumencie.
|
||
LyX pomaga wykonać rzeczy trochę prościej za pomocą interfejsu do programu
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
makeindex
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Dla dokumentów polskojęzycznych powinien być wywoływany program
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
plmindex
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
, który można znaleźć w dystrybucjach.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wstawianie indeksu i zaznaczanie słów do włączenia do indeksu odbywa się
|
||
taką samą drogą jak przygotowanie bibliografii opisanej w poprzedniej sekcji.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Najpierw przejdź na koniec swojego dokumentu i wybierz
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
S
|
||
\bar default
|
||
pisy\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
I
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ndeks
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Następnie, dla każdego słowa, które chcesz dodać do indeksu, umieść kursor
|
||
na końcu tego słowa i wybierz
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Wstaw poprzedzające słowo do indeksu
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
To spowoduje umieszczenie znacznika pokazującego słowo, które pojawi się
|
||
w indeksie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeżeli chcesz dokładnie podać co ma pojawić się w indeksie -- na przykład
|
||
potrzebujesz mieć słowo ,,kot'' w indeksie, które będzie odnosiło się do
|
||
słów w tekście ,,kot'' i ,,koty'' to po prostu wybierz polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Wstaw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Słowo do indeksu
|
||
\family default
|
||
i wpisz słowo ,,kot'' w oknie dialogowym.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
I to wszystko.
|
||
LyX automatycznie wywoła
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
makeindex
|
||
\family default
|
||
i samodzielnie utworzy indeks.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Bądź ostrożny i nie wstawiaj spacji pomiędzy słowem a znacznikiem indeksu,
|
||
ponieważ może się zdarzyć utworzenie niewłaściwego numeru strony w indeksie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Powinieneś zdawać sobie sprawę, że istnieją bardziej zaawansowane metody
|
||
użycia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
makeindex
|
||
\family default
|
||
: spójrz w dokumentację dołączoną do Twojej dystrybucji LaTeX-a i znajdź
|
||
jak wykonać zagnieżdżone wpisy itp.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Dokumenty wieloczęściowe
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Podstawy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Przy pracy z dużymi plikami zawierającymi wiele sekcji i rozdziałów, często
|
||
jest wygodniej podzielić dokument na kilka plików lub być może masz ---
|
||
perhaps you have something where a table may change from time to time,
|
||
but the preceding text does not.
|
||
W takim przypadku powinieneś na serio rozważyć użycie dokumentów wieloczęściowy
|
||
ch.
|
||
Na przykład prace naukowe często składają się z pięciu głównych części:
|
||
wprowadzenia, obserwacji, wyników, dyskusji i podsumowania.
|
||
Każda z tych części może być zapisana w oddzielnym pliku LyX-a, gdzie jeden
|
||
plik będzie dokumentem głównym zawierającym tytuł, autorów, streszczenie,
|
||
spis treści, itd.
|
||
oraz pięć dołączonych plików dokumentów składowych (podrzędnych).
|
||
Należy zwrócić uwagę, że każdy z plików podrzędnych włączanych do dokumentu
|
||
głównego stanowi niezależny dokument, który może być formatowany i drukowany
|
||
niezależnie.
|
||
Można dołączać również pliki LaTeX-a, ale pliki te nie mogą posiadać własnej
|
||
preambuły (wszystko przed
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{document}
|
||
\family default
|
||
i za
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{document}
|
||
\family default
|
||
musi być usunięte) gdyż w przeciwnym wypadku LaTeX zgłosi błąd podczas
|
||
przetwarzania dokumentu głównego.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX pozwala łatwo włączać pliki poleceniem z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
D
|
||
\bar under
|
||
o
|
||
\bar default
|
||
łącz plik
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Po wybraniu polecenia otwiera się okno wyboru dokumentu.
|
||
Po wybraniu dokumentu do wstawienia/dołączenia, w bieżącej pozycji kursora
|
||
wstawiany jest mały prostokąt.
|
||
Kliknięcie na prostokącie wyświetla okno dialogowe dołączania dokumentu.
|
||
W tym oknie można wybrać plik do dołączenia i metodę dołączenia.
|
||
Wybór pliku powinien być już jasny.
|
||
W oknie mamy do wyboru trzy metody dołączania plików; ,,dołącz'', ,,wstaw''
|
||
i ,,maszynopis''.
|
||
Różnica pomiędzy ,,dołącz'' a ,,wstaw'' jest w pełni jasna tylko dla LaTeX-pert
|
||
ów.
|
||
Praktycznie różnica polega na tym, że pliki ,,dołączane'' zaczynają się
|
||
od nowej strony, a pliki ,,wstawiane'' od miejsca wstawienia.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Generalnie, plik główny jest konwertowany do formatu LaTeX przed składaniem,
|
||
podczas gdy dołączane pliki są konwertowane do formatu LaTeX, który nie
|
||
zawiera preambuły.
|
||
Zaznaczenie pola Nie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
formatuj
|
||
\family default
|
||
zabezpiecza przed konwersją.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dołączanie plików metodą ,,maszynopis'' pozwala na dołączanie ,,dosłowne''
|
||
plików w środowisku verbatim z czcionką o stałej szerokości.
|
||
Normalnie spacje w pliku są niewidzialne, dwie kolejne spacje są zachowywane,
|
||
inaczej niż standardowo w LyX-ie.
|
||
Przycisk
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Zachowaj spacje
|
||
\family default
|
||
pozwala na zachowanie spacji lub przywraca standardową interpretację spacji
|
||
wielokrotnych.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Odnośniki pomiędzy plikami
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jest możliwe ustawienie odnośników pomiędzy różnymi plikami.
|
||
Najpierw otwórz wszystkie pliki pomiędzy którymi chcesz wykonać odnośniki,
|
||
na przykład dwa pliki A i B, gdzie plik B jest dołączony do pliku A.
|
||
Wstawiliśmy etykietę w pliku A i chcemy odnośnik do niej w pliku B.
|
||
Będąc w dokumencie A z menu wybieramy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw \SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
O
|
||
\bar default
|
||
dnośnik wewnętrzny
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Teraz przełączamy się na dokument B bez zamykania okna odnośnika.
|
||
Wstawiamy odnośnik i już!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Gdy przeglądasz plik A wszystko jest poprawnie dołączone i etykietowane.
|
||
Jeśli zamkniesz okno odnośnika i ponownie otworzysz je w dokumencie B to
|
||
zobaczysz tylko etykiety pliku B.
|
||
Ta procedura może nie jest intuicyjna (czasami zdarza się błąd) ale działa.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Algorytmy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
(z konfiguracji LaTeX)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pakiet
|
||
\family sans
|
||
algorithm
|
||
\family default
|
||
jest potrzebny do wydania ,,wstawek algorytmów''.
|
||
Jest on użyteczny przy umieszczaniu krótkich algorytmów w miejscu złamania
|
||
strony i obsługuje także spis algorytmów.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Podrysunek
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
(z konfiguracji LaTeX)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pakiet
|
||
\family sans
|
||
subfigure
|
||
\family default
|
||
jest używany w LyX-ie podczas wyboru ,,Podrysunek'' w oknie Rysunek.
|
||
Kilka rysunków zaznaczonych w ten sposób może być upakowanych w jednej
|
||
wstawce w indywidualnymi podpisami.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Ozdobne nagłówki i stopki
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Właściwie powinnyśmy używać nazw:
|
||
\emph on
|
||
pagina górna
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
pagina dolna
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Domyślny układ strony jest raczej nieskomplikowany -- plain; dla klasy artykuł
|
||
numery stron są wycentrowane u dołu strony.
|
||
Ten dokument jest klasy książka (book) i jest trochę bardziej ozdobny,
|
||
ale aby rzeczywiście postawić na wygląd potrzebujesz użyć stylu ,,fancy''
|
||
co wspomniano w
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręczniku Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
Ta sekcja opisuje polecenia LaTeX-a, które trzeba wstawić w preambule lub
|
||
w tekście aby otrzymać żądany efekt.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Nagłówek i stopka strony są podzielone na trzy pola określające lewą, środkową
|
||
i prawą ich część.
|
||
Poleceniami LaTeX-a do ustawiania tych pól w najprostszy sposób są
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
lhead
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
chead
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
rhead
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
lfoot
|
||
\family default
|
||
itd.
|
||
przypuśćmy, że chcesz wstawić swoje nazwisko w lewym górnym narożniku każdej
|
||
strony.
|
||
Po prostu wstaw następujące polecenie w preambule:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
lhead{John Q.
|
||
DocWriter}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zobaczysz w podglądzie swoje nazwisko w lewym górnym narożniku każdej strony.
|
||
Jeśli pole ma domyślną wartość, której chcesz się pozbyć (często numer
|
||
strony pojawia się w centralnej części stopki) to po prostu wstaw polecenie
|
||
z pustym argumentem, jak w przykładzie:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
cfoot{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zróbmy rzeczywiście ozdobną stronę: wstawmy w nagłówku po lewej nazwę sekcji
|
||
wraz ze słowem ,,Sekcja'' (np.
|
||
Sekcja 3) oraz numer strony po prawej (np.
|
||
Strona 4), natomiast w stopce po lewej swoje nazwisko i datę po prawej.
|
||
Do tego będą nam potrzebne następujące polecenia w preambule:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
lhead{Sekcja
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thesection}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
chead{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
rhead{Strona
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thepage}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
lfoot{John Q.
|
||
DocWriter}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
cfoot{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
rfoot{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
today}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thesection
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thepage
|
||
\family default
|
||
dają dostęp do liczników sekcji i stron LaTeX-a, i będą wydrukowane w bieżącej
|
||
sekcji i numerze strony.
|
||
Polecenie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
today
|
||
\family default
|
||
wydrukuje bieżącą datę.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Cienką linię oddzielającą nagłówek i stopkę od treści strony możemy także
|
||
zmodyfikować.
|
||
Jeśli nie chcesz linii w nagłówku to ustal jej grubość na 0.
|
||
Domyślną grubością linii nagłówkowej jest 0.4pt, dla linii stopki zaś jest
|
||
0pt.
|
||
Możesz użyć polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
headrulewidth}{0.4pt}
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
footrulewidth}{0.4pt}
|
||
\family default
|
||
do ustawiania ich grubości.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz przełączać i wyłączać ustawienia nagłówków/stopek za pomocą poleceń:
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thispagestyle{empty}
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thispagestyle{plain}
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thispagestyle{fancy}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Po prostu wstaw je w tekście na stronie, którą chcesz zmienić i zaznacz
|
||
je jako kod TeX-a.
|
||
Strony tytułowe są oznaczone domyślnie jako plain, podczas gdy kolejne
|
||
strony są w stylu fancy gdy używasz globalnego ustawienia fancy.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Istnieje wiele złożonych poleceń, które będą wstawiały rzeczy w lewym górnym
|
||
narożniku na stronach nieparzystych itd.
|
||
ale po szczegóły odsyłamy Cię do dokumentacji pakietu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
fancyhdr
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Na przykład jeśli masz instalację teTeX-a zobacz
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
/usr/share/texmf/doc/latex/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.dvi
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Końcowym przykładem jest możliwość wstawienia pliku Encapsulated PostScript
|
||
do nagłówka lub stopki.
|
||
Pewnie będziesz chciał wstawić logo firmy do lewego dolnego narożnika strony.
|
||
Spróbuj wstawić następujące polecenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
lhead{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
resizebox{1in}{!}{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
includegraphics{logo.eps}}}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\noindent
|
||
(będzie potrzebne w preambule polecenie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{graphics}
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Ministrony
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LaTeX dostarcza mechanizmu do tworzenia strony wewnątrz strony, zwanych
|
||
ministronami (minipages).
|
||
Wewnątrz ministrony są dostępne wszystkie zwykłe reguły wcinania, łamania
|
||
wierszy itd.
|
||
LyX także dostarcza tę możliwość.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ministrony posiadają własną wstawkę, aby wstawić ministronę wybierz polecenie
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw \SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
M
|
||
\bar default
|
||
inistrony
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Klikając prawym klawiszem myszy na wstawkę otwiera się okienko, w którym
|
||
można ustalić wyrównianie i szerokość ministrony.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Uwaga.
|
||
Jeśli ministrona jest zbyt długa aby zmieścić się na stronie, to zostanie
|
||
skrócona, a nie wcięta na następnej stronie (nie pojawi się reszta na następnej
|
||
stronie).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Są dwie dalsze opcje ministron.
|
||
Jeśli umieścisz dwie ministrony obok siebie, to można wstawić
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
Z
|
||
\bar default
|
||
nak specjalny\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
HFill
|
||
\family default
|
||
do maksymalnego rozsunięcia ich, który wymuszi początek pierwszej ministrony
|
||
od lewego marginesu a koniec następnej na prawym marginesie.
|
||
Sprawdź tą opcję dla drugiej ministrony, nie dla pierwszej.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset Box Frameless
|
||
position "t"
|
||
hor_pos "c"
|
||
has_inner_box 1
|
||
inner_pos "c"
|
||
use_parbox 0
|
||
use_makebox 0
|
||
width "1.5in"
|
||
special "none"
|
||
height "1pt"
|
||
height_special "totalheight"
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
To jest ministrona, która nie używa hfill.
|
||
To jest drugie zdanie ministrony, która nie używa hfill.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset Box Frameless
|
||
position "t"
|
||
hor_pos "c"
|
||
has_inner_box 1
|
||
inner_pos "c"
|
||
use_parbox 0
|
||
use_makebox 0
|
||
width "1.5in"
|
||
special "none"
|
||
height "1pt"
|
||
height_special "totalheight"
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
To jest druga ministrona, która nie używa hfill.
|
||
To jest drugie zdanie drugiej ministrony, która nie używa hfill.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace medskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
To jest zwykły tekst, który rozdziela dwa przykłady
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace medskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset Box Frameless
|
||
position "t"
|
||
hor_pos "c"
|
||
has_inner_box 1
|
||
inner_pos "c"
|
||
use_parbox 0
|
||
use_makebox 0
|
||
width "1.5in"
|
||
special "none"
|
||
height "1pt"
|
||
height_special "totalheight"
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
To jest ministrona, która używa hfill.
|
||
To jest drugie zdanie ministrony, która używa hfill.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Box Frameless
|
||
position "t"
|
||
hor_pos "c"
|
||
has_inner_box 1
|
||
inner_pos "c"
|
||
use_parbox 0
|
||
use_makebox 0
|
||
width "1.5in"
|
||
special "none"
|
||
height "1pt"
|
||
height_special "totalheight"
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
To jest druga ministrona, która używa hfill.
|
||
To jest drugie zdanie drugiej ministrony, która używa hfill.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Oblewanie rysunku tekstem
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset Wrap figure
|
||
lines 0
|
||
placement r
|
||
overhang 0col%
|
||
width "6cm"
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\begin_inset Graphics
|
||
filename ../clipart/mobius.eps
|
||
width 40col%
|
||
rotateOrigin center
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\begin_inset Caption Standard
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Ten rysunek jest oblany tekstem, a to jest śliczny podpis
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Często zadawanym pytaniem jest pytanie o możliwość ,,oblewania'' rysunków
|
||
tekstem w ten sposób, że rysunek zajmuje część kolumny a reszta jest wypełniona
|
||
tekstem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Obok znajduje się rysunek pętli Moebiusa -- powinieneś go już zobaczyć w
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręczniku Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
Aby oblać tekstem rysunek jak ten, nalezy wybrac z menu polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
stawki\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Rysunek oblany
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Uwaga: ten pakiet jest bardzo kruchy
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Kruchy w sensie LaTeX-a.
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Dla przykładu, mając rysunek zbyt blisko końca strony będzie zamieszanie
|
||
treści powyżej, gdy będziemy mieć dwa rysunki blisko siebie.
|
||
Używaj tego pakietu oszczędnie i czytaj dokumentację zawartą w pakiecie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Miejmy nadzieję, że w przyszłości LyX będzie obsługiwał te funkcje natywnie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Opcje tabel
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Standardowy układ tabel będzie odpowiedni w 99% wszystkich Twoich tabel,
|
||
ale w 1% prawdopodobnie będziesz potrzebował tabel specjalnie dostosowanych
|
||
do swoich wymagań.
|
||
Polecenie z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
T
|
||
\bar default
|
||
abela
|
||
\family default
|
||
otwiera okno formatowania tabeli.
|
||
W zakładce
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Kolumna
|
||
\family default
|
||
/
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Wiersz
|
||
\family default
|
||
znajduje się dostęp do kilku poleceń wyrównywania kolumn.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Teraz krótkie wspomnienie o LaTeX-u: gdy ustawiamy tabelę w LaTeX-u to dla
|
||
każdej kolumny deklarujemy typ wyrównania.
|
||
Dla przykładu możesz podać ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
l
|
||
\family default
|
||
'',,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
c
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' lub ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
r
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' dla justowania do lewej, wyśrodkowania i wyrównania kolumny do prawej
|
||
(co w LyX-ie objawia się trzema przyciskami
|
||
\family sans
|
||
W lewo
|
||
\family default
|
||
/
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Center
|
||
\family default
|
||
/
|
||
\family sans
|
||
W prawo
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
Czwartym typem jest ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
p
|
||
\family default
|
||
'', który deklaruje szerokość kolumny (w LyX-ie mamy pole
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Szerokość
|
||
\family default
|
||
) co powoduje automatyczne łamanie wierszy.
|
||
Piątym typem jest ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' (vertical bar), który raczej służy do tworzenia pionowych kresek ramek
|
||
(w LyX-ie mamy do tego przyciski w polu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Ramka
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
Kończąc, istnieje typ ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
@
|
||
\family default
|
||
'', który pozwala użyć cokolwiek jako separatora kolumn co jest zamknięte
|
||
w towarzyszących nawiasach włączając argument pusty.
|
||
Powody robienia tego mogą nie być jasne, ale cechy te mogą być bardzo użyteczne.
|
||
Najlepiej to pokazać na przykładach.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Usuwanie dodatkowej przestrzeni tabeli
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Tutaj znajduje się standardowa tabela:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
\begin_inset Tabular
|
||
<lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="2">
|
||
<features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
|
||
<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
|
||
<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Type
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Example
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Rock
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Granite
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Mineral
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Quartz
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</lyxtabular>
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zwróć uwagę, że poziome kreski wystają troszkę z obu strona poza tekst.
|
||
Jeśli chcesz aby linie zaczynały i kończyły się równo z tekstem, to można
|
||
wstawić pusty separator na końcu aby zwolnić trochę miejsca dodawanego
|
||
domyślnie przez LaTeX-a.
|
||
Oto przykład:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
\begin_inset Tabular
|
||
<lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="2">
|
||
<features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
|
||
<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt" special="@{} l">
|
||
<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt" special="l @{}">
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Type
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Example
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Rock
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Granite
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Mineral
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Quartz
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</lyxtabular>
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W tym przypadku w polu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Wyrównanie
|
||
\family default
|
||
w
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Kolumnie specjalnej
|
||
\family default
|
||
dla lewej kolumny wpisano ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
@{} l
|
||
\family default
|
||
'', natomiast dla prawej wpisano ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
l @{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
'', co wstawia puste znaki na końcach.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Zmiana znaku separatora kolumn
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Teraz proponujemy zastosowanie
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{\pi}$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
z odrobiną miejsca obok jako separatora kolumn tabeli.
|
||
Po prostu wyłącz pionowe ramki i wpisz w polu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Wyrównanie
|
||
\family default
|
||
w obszarze
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Kolumna specjalna ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
l@{~$
|
||
\backslash
|
||
sqrt{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pi}$~} l
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
Oto wynik:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
.
|
||
\begin_inset Tabular
|
||
<lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="2">
|
||
<features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
|
||
<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
|
||
<column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt" special="@{~$\sqrt{\pi}$~}l">
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Type
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Example
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Rock
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Granite
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Mineral
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Quartz
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</lyxtabular>
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wyrównanie kolumny według cyfr znaczących
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Proponujemy wyrównanie kolumny według cyfr znaczących.
|
||
Standardowym trickiem LaTeX-a jest podzielenie liczby na dwie kolumny;
|
||
w lewej -- przeznaczonej dla części całkowitej -- wyrównujemy do prawej
|
||
strony, a w prawej -- przeznaczonej dla części ułamkowej -- wyrównujemy
|
||
do lewej, natomiast separator kolumn ustawiamy jako pusty.
|
||
Oto przykład:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
\begin_inset Tabular
|
||
<lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
|
||
<features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
|
||
<column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
|
||
<column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
|
||
<column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt" special="@{} l">
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Wyrażenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Wartość
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\pi$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="right" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
3.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
1416
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\pi^{\pi}$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
36.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
462
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $(\pi^{\pi})^{\pi}$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
80663.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\pi^{\pi^{\pi}}$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
1.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
3402
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\times10^{18}$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</lyxtabular>
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Mimo że będzie to wyglądało trochę śmiesznie w LyX-ie, to na wydruku pojawią
|
||
się dwukolumnowa tabela, w której prawa kolumna jest wyrównana według cyfr
|
||
znaczących, a nagłówek jest wyśrodkowany.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Myślę, że najlepiej będzie jak opiszę jak to zrobiłem: Najpierw utworzyłem
|
||
tabelę 3 x 3 i usunąłem wszystkie ramki.
|
||
Następnie dodałem ramki pod nagłówkiem i rozdzielającą pierwszą i drugą
|
||
kolumnę.
|
||
Pierwsza kolumna jest wyśrodkowana.
|
||
W drugiej kolumnie wpisałem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
3.
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
36.
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
80663.
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
1.
|
||
\family default
|
||
, i wyrównałem tę kolumnę do prawej.
|
||
W trzeciej kolumnie wpisałem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
1416
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
462
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
3402
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\times10^{18}$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
oraz ustawiłem wyrównanie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
@{} l
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Na końcu wpisałem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Wartość
|
||
\family default
|
||
w środkowej kolumnie, podświetliłem je, wyrównałem do prawej.
|
||
Czyż nie łatwe?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Lepsze rozwiązanie wyrównania według cyfr znaczących
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Alternatywnym rozwiązaniem wyrównania według cyfr znaczących w tabelach
|
||
jest użycie pakietu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
dcolumn
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Dodaj następujący tekst do preambuły LaTeX-a:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{dcolumn}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
newcolumntype{d}[1]{D{.}{.}{#1}}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Aby mieć kolumny wyrównane według cyfr znaczących wpisz w polu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Wyrównanie
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie formatu tabeli w zakładce
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Kolumny/Wiersze
|
||
\family default
|
||
następujący tekst:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
d{liczba miejsc dziesiętnych danych}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\family roman
|
||
\emph on
|
||
[Przykładową tabelę usunięto.
|
||
Zobacz plik
|
||
\family default
|
||
\emph default
|
||
decimal.lyx
|
||
\family roman
|
||
\emph on
|
||
w katalogu examples.]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Do utworzenia dodatkowego miejsca zwiększ liczbę miejsc dziesiętnych w
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
d{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Ustaw atrybut
|
||
\family sans
|
||
multicolumn
|
||
\family default
|
||
dla pojedynczej komórki niewrażliwy na wyrównanie względem cyfr znaczących.
|
||
Wadą tej metody jest to, że tryb matematyczny nie jest dopuszczalny w kolumnie
|
||
z wyrównaniem względem cyfr znaczących z wyjątkiem jeśli atrybut multicolumn
|
||
jest włączony.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ta metoda oferuje taką samą elastyczność jak pakiet
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
dcolumn
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Możemy, na przykład zmienić separator wyrównania i mamy różne znaki separatorów
|
||
dla różnych kolumn przez definicję typów wielokrotnych kolumn w preambule.
|
||
Składnia jest następująca:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
D{separator_wej}{separator_wyj}{liczba_miejsc_dzieś}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zainteresowanym czytelnikom polecamy dokumentację do pakietu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
dcolumn
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Wybór znaku wyliczenia
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:bullet"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Allan Rae
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX dostarcza 216 znaków dostępnych wprost z menu.
|
||
Użycie tego menu daje Ci możliwość łatwego wyboru odpowiedniego znaku dla
|
||
każdego poziomu zagnieżdżenia wyliczeń.
|
||
Te ustawienia są globalne dla całego dokumentu i nie można ustawić różnych
|
||
znaków w różnych akapitach
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Można tego dokonać tylko ręcznie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Jak je zobaczyć
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Otwórz z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
okument
|
||
\family default
|
||
i wybierz zakładkę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
yróżnienia.
|
||
\family default
|
||
W zakładce wyświetlona jest tabela znaków wyliczenia.
|
||
Za pomocą przycisków umieszczonych po lewej stronie okna mamy dostęp do
|
||
sześciu zestawów znaków.
|
||
Przyciski umieszczone w górnej części okna przeznaczone są do wyboru głębokości
|
||
zagnieżdżenia wyliczenia.
|
||
Tekst pod tabelą zestawu znaków wyświetla nazwę LaTeX-a aktualnie wybranego
|
||
znaku.
|
||
Można również w tym miejscu podać własne definicje znaku wyliczenia.
|
||
Jeśli zmodyfikujesz domyślne ustawienia to będziesz potrzebował podać potrzebne
|
||
pakiety w preambule.
|
||
Znaki podzielone są na sześć zestawów ze względu na wymagane pakiety.
|
||
Poniższa tabela przedstawia przypisanie zestawów do pakietów LaTeX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
\begin_inset Tabular
|
||
<lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
|
||
<features rotate="0" tabularvalignment="middle">
|
||
<column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
|
||
<column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Przycisk
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Wymagany pakiet
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Standard
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
base LaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Maths
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
amssymb.sty
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Ding1
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
pifont.sty
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Ding2
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
pifont.sty
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Ding3
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
pifont.sty
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Ding4
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
pifont.sty
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</lyxtabular>
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX nie zatrzyma Cię przed użyciem znaku z pakietu którego nie masz.
|
||
Jeśli otrzymasz komunikat błędu LaTeX-a podczas próby podglądu lub wydruku
|
||
będzie on oznaczał brak wymaganego pakietu.
|
||
LyX nie będzie ograniczał użycia przy lokalnej edycji i eksporcie gdziekolwiek.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Jak użyć
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wybierz przycisk głębokości wyliczenia i następnie wybierz znak i wielkość.
|
||
Zmiana nie będzie widoczna w LyX-ie, ale będzie widoczna w podglądzie dokumentu
|
||
przy użyciu xdvi lub ghostview.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz przywrócić domyślny znak wyliczenia przez kliknięcie prawym klawiszem
|
||
myszy na przycisku poziomu wyliczenia.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli rzeczywiście chcesz mieć wiele układów akapitów z różnymi zestawami
|
||
znaków wyliczenia w każdym musisz wykonać trochę brudnej roboty.
|
||
Okno wyboru znaku wyliczenia może pomóc w znalezieniu nazwy LaTeX-owej
|
||
znaku.
|
||
Aby zrobić własne akapity musisz mieś następującą opcję:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
let
|
||
\backslash
|
||
savelabelitemi=
|
||
\backslash
|
||
labelitemi
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand
|
||
\backslash
|
||
labelitemi[0]{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
small
|
||
\backslash
|
||
(
|
||
\backslash
|
||
sharp
|
||
\backslash
|
||
)}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Użyj polecenia LaTeX-a
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand{}{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
do specyfikacji nowego znaku wyliczenia dla zadanej głębokości zagnieżdżenia.
|
||
To będzie także potrzebne do zapisu bieżącego znaku i jego późniejszego
|
||
ponownego przywołania.
|
||
W tym wyliczeniu zostały użyte następujące kody LaTeX-a do zmiany znaku
|
||
wyliczenia w pierwszym poziomie.
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
let
|
||
\backslash
|
||
savelabelitemi=
|
||
\backslash
|
||
labelitemi
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand
|
||
\backslash
|
||
labelitemi[0]{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
small
|
||
\backslash
|
||
(
|
||
\backslash
|
||
sharp
|
||
\backslash
|
||
)}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Uwaga głębokość zagnieżdżenia w poleceniu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
labelitem
|
||
\family default
|
||
jest podawana cyframi rzymskimi (podobnie jak numeracja części).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
[
|
||
\backslash
|
||
(
|
||
\backslash
|
||
star
|
||
\backslash
|
||
)]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Podaj dla każdego indywidualnego wiersza wyliczenia kod znaku zamknięty
|
||
w nawiasy prostokątne i wpisane w trybie TeX.
|
||
Na przykład ten wiersz zaczyna się znakiem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
[
|
||
\backslash
|
||
(
|
||
\backslash
|
||
star
|
||
\backslash
|
||
)]
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Poczekaj na LyX 1.2.
|
||
Następne stabilne wydanie LyX-a powinna mieć wbudowaną obsługę definiowania
|
||
dla każdego wyliczenia oddzielnego zestawu znaków.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand
|
||
\backslash
|
||
labelitemi[0]{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
savelabelitemi}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli będziesz potrzebował przywrócić z powrotem poprzednie globalne ustawienia
|
||
znaków to należy wpisać:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand
|
||
\backslash
|
||
labelitemi[0]{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
savelabelitemi}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Chapter
|
||
Specjalne klasy dokumentu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
AMS Math
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by David
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Johnson
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\noindent
|
||
Układ AMS-Math jest zestawem styli zalecanymi dla składu pism matematycznych
|
||
przesyłanych do wydawnictwa American Mathematical Society.
|
||
Układ nie jest przycięty do specyfiki pisma, ale można to łatwo zrobić.
|
||
Powinieneś przejrzeć dokumentację AMS pod kątem specyficznych instrukcji
|
||
dla każdego pisma (często wymagana jest tylko zmiana w jednym wierszu).
|
||
Dokumentacja AMS jest dostępna w internecie na stronie
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
http://www.ams.org
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
lub przez ftp
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
ftp://ftp.ams.org/pub/tex/amslatex/
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Te układy są odpowiednie i użyteczne dla zapisu matematyki.
|
||
Są aktualnie dostępne różne układy AMS-math:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
amsart -- standardowy format artykułu -- AMS article.
|
||
Wszystkie równania i wyrażenia są numerowane jako
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $(n.m)$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, gdzie pierwsza liczba oznacza sekcję, a druga odpowiada kolejnemu numerowi
|
||
środowiska (Theorems, Corollaries, Propositions, Definitions, Remarks,
|
||
itd.) w tej sekcji.
|
||
Istnieje także kilka (ale nie wszystkie) środowisk nienumerowanych, które
|
||
są używane okazjonalnie.
|
||
Nazwy nienumerowanych środowisk kończą się znakiem gwiazdki (*).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
amsart-seq -- tutaj, twierdzenia, definicje itd.
|
||
są numerowane kolejno, bez odniesienia do numeru sekcji.
|
||
Dostępne są również nienumerowane środowiska (ale nie wszystkie), do okazjonaln
|
||
ego użycia.
|
||
Nazwy nienumerowanych środowisk kończą się znakiem gwiazdki (*).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
amsbook - standardowy format książki -- AMS book (prawdziwe monografie).
|
||
Numeracja jest podobna jak w układzie amsart, z wyjątkiem numeracji wszystkiego
|
||
jako
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $(n,m,p)$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, gdzie pierwszy numer odnosi się do numeru rozdziału, drugi do sekcji,
|
||
a trzeci jest numerem kolejnym wyrażenia (Theorems, Corollaries, Propositions,
|
||
Definitions, Remarks, itd.) w tej sekcji.
|
||
Istnieje także kilka (ale nie wszystkie) środowisk nienumerowanych, które
|
||
są używane okazjonalnie.
|
||
Nazwy nienumerowanych środowisk kończą się znakiem gwiazdki (*).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dowolne pliki LyX-a ams-* mogą być konwertowane do schematu przez prostą
|
||
zmianę klasy dokumentu w menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
okument
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Co daje ten szablon?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Te układy dostarczają długą listę środowisk.
|
||
Najbardziej matematyczne pisma i książki będą korzystać w większości z
|
||
tych środowisk, AMS-LaTeX-u sprzyja definiowaniu nieograniczonej liczby
|
||
rozmaitych takich deklaracji.
|
||
Jednak zalecane przez AMS środowiska są dostępne w LyX-ie.
|
||
Oto lista nowych środowisk (nie wyliczamy typowych takich jak
|
||
\family sans
|
||
sections, bibliography, title, author, date
|
||
\family default
|
||
):
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Theorem This is typically used for the statements of major results.
|
||
Słowo
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,Theorem
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' wyświetlane jest czcionką półgrubą, along with an automatically-determined
|
||
number (an unnumbered version,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Theorem*
|
||
\family default
|
||
, is also available).
|
||
Tekst jest pochylony.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Corollary This is used for statements which follow fairly directly from
|
||
previous statements.
|
||
Again, these can be major results.
|
||
Unnumbered version
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Corollary*
|
||
\family default
|
||
is available.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Lemma These are smaller results needed to prove other statements.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Proposition These are less major results which (hopefully) add to the general
|
||
theory being discussed.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Conjecture These are statements provided without justification, which the
|
||
author does not know how to prove, but which seem to be true (to the author,
|
||
at least).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Criterion A required condition.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Algorithm A general procedure to be used.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Axiom This is a property or statement taken as true within the system being
|
||
discussed.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Definition Guess what this is for.
|
||
The font, both on-screen and in the output, is different for this environment
|
||
than for the previous ones.
|
||
The heading (,,definition'') is still set in boldface, along with the number,
|
||
if any, but the rest is set upright.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Example Skład jest podobny do Definition.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Condition
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Problem
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Exercise
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Remark This environment is also a new type of theorem.
|
||
This is set with the word Remark in italics, and the rest upright.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Note Set similarly to the Remark environment.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Notation
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Claim
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Summary
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Acknowledgement
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Case Generally, these are used to break up long arguments, using specific
|
||
instances of some condition.
|
||
The numbering scheme for cases is on its own, not together with other numbered
|
||
statements.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Conclusion
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Fact
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Proof Słowo ,,
|
||
\shape italic
|
||
Proof
|
||
\shape default
|
||
'' jest pisane kursywą, but the rest is set upright.
|
||
At the end of this environment (other environments can be nested within
|
||
this one, of course) a QED symbol (usually a square, but it can vary with
|
||
different styles) is placed.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Address Tu powinien być podany stały adres autora.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Current
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Address Tu powinien być podany czasowy adres autora, gdy wysyłał dokument,
|
||
o ile jest różny od podanego powyżej w Address.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Email Adres e-mail autora
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
URL Adres strony internetowej autora.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Keywords Słowa kluczowe i frazy używane do identyfikacji specyficznych dyskutowa
|
||
nych tematów w prasie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Subjectclass These refer to the AMS Subject Classifications, published and
|
||
described in
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Mathematical Reviews
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
These are also available online at the AMS cites listed above.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Thanks
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Dedicatory
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
Translator
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ponadto, środowiska automatycznie włączają pakiety AMS-LaTeX i czcionki
|
||
AMS, które muszą być dostępne w Twoim systemie, aby można było używać tych
|
||
układów.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Dinbrief
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Klasa dokumentu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
dinbrief
|
||
\family default
|
||
może być użyta do pisania listów zgodnie z niemiecką konwencją.
|
||
Dla Ciebie w folderze
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.../lyx/share/templates
|
||
\family default
|
||
znajduje się plik przykładowy, aby było łatwiej zacząć.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Paper
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Klasa dokumentu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
paper
|
||
\family default
|
||
jest alternatywą dla standardowej klasy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
article
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Daje ona podobną funkcjonalność, ale można preferować w tym układzie bezszeryfo
|
||
we tytularia i jeszcze więcej.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
A&A Paper
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Peter
|
||
\noun default
|
||
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Sütterlin
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W tej sekcji opisano jak można użyć LyX-a do pisania artykułów do pism naukowych
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Astronomy and Astrophysics
|
||
\emph default
|
||
oraz
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Supplement Series
|
||
\emph default
|
||
przy użyciu klasy dokumentu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
aa.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
z pakietu makr wydawnictwa Springer.
|
||
Ten pakiet może być ściągnięty z serwera ftp Springera
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace medskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
ftp://ftp.springer.de/pub/tex/latex/aa
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace medskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Instrukcja do A&A Paper jest dostarczana razem z pakietem.
|
||
Ten tekst nie ma na celu zastąpienia oryginalnej instrukcji ale jest krótkim
|
||
przewodnikiem jak wykorzystać ten format.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Zaczynamy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Aby zacząć nowy dokument wybieramy z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
N
|
||
\bar default
|
||
owy
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Nowy z
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
s
|
||
\bar default
|
||
zablonu
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Zalecamy korzystanie z szablonu.
|
||
Either create one yourself, or ask the local system administrator to suply
|
||
a site-wide version.
|
||
Przykładowy szablon jest częścią standardowej dystrybucji LyX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jeśli nie użyłeś szablonu to zwróć uwagę na następujące ustawienia:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Wybierz klasę dokumentu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
paper (A&A)
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
S
|
||
\bar default
|
||
tyl dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
w zakładce
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Dokument
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Nie zmieniaj opcji
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
S
|
||
\bar default
|
||
tyl strony
|
||
\family default
|
||
: pozostaw
|
||
\family sans
|
||
domyślny
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Układ jest zrobiony za pomocą makr i nie powinieneś niczego zmieniać.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Możesz chcieć użyć czcionki
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Times
|
||
\family default
|
||
wybierając z listy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
C
|
||
\bar default
|
||
zcionka
|
||
\family default
|
||
, jako sugerowanej przez wydawnictwo Springer dla jednolitego wyglądu tekstu
|
||
wydruków.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Nagłówek
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pierwszą rzeczą do wprowadzenia jest dane nagłówkowe.
|
||
Które zawierają osiem wpisów, z których kilka jest opcjonalnych.
|
||
Oto one:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Thesaurus
|
||
\family default
|
||
: [wymagane] Zobacz podręcznik Springera.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
: [wymagane]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Subtitle
|
||
\family default
|
||
: [wymagane]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
: [wymagane]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Address
|
||
\family default
|
||
: [wymagane]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Offprints
|
||
\family default
|
||
: [opcjonalne] jeśli jest więcej niż jeden autor, to komu wysłać odbitki.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Email
|
||
\family default
|
||
: [opcjonalne] adres e-mail dla kontaktu z autorem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
: [wymagane].
|
||
Suggested format is
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Received: <date> / Accepted <date>
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Nie potrzeba wydawać polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
maketitle
|
||
\family default
|
||
, jest to robione automatycznie przez LyX gdy nagłówek jest zakończony.
|
||
Although the order of the single header entries doesn't matter it is advised
|
||
to keep the above sequence, just to get the best optics and meets the layout
|
||
of the real document.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli chcesz umieścić przypis w nagłówku, np.
|
||
dla wskazania twojego aktualnego adresu, możesz użyć standardowego przypisu
|
||
za pomocą
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
rzypis.
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
LyX w takim przypadku użyje automatycznie określenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thanks{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
In addition to these topics, Springer uses two additional LaTeX commands
|
||
that have no counterpart in LyX:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
and
|
||
\family default
|
||
do oddzielenia różnych nazw takich jak autorzy, instytucje.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
inst{<nr>}
|
||
\family default
|
||
to mark corresponding author/institute pairs.
|
||
The institutes are numbered sequentially as they appear in the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Address
|
||
\family default
|
||
field, so you have to put a marker to each author.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
In both cases, the appropriate command has to be entered in LyX an marked
|
||
as LaTeX code.
|
||
See the examples.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Streszczenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Streszczenie powinno się znajdować bezpośrednio za nagłówkiem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The only special thing about the abstract environment is that it should
|
||
contain an entry with the keywords.
|
||
This is not yet implemented for LyX, therefore you have to enter the LaTeX
|
||
command
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
keywords{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
by hand and mark it as LaTeX code.
|
||
Zobacz przykładowy artykuł.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Obsługiwane środowiska
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Układ A&A paper obsługuje następujące środowiska dla strukturyzacji tekstu:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Standard
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Section
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Subsection
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Subsubsection
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Itemize
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Enumerate
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Description
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Caption
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Abstract
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Acknowledgment
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Bibliography
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Polecenia nie obsługiwane przez LyX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Kilka poleceń układu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
paper (A&A)
|
||
\family default
|
||
nie jest jeszcze obsługiwane w LyX-ie.
|
||
Kilka zostało już omówionych.
|
||
Dla kompletności poniżej są one wszystkie wypisane:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
and
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
appendix
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
authorrunning
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
inst{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
keywords{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
object{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
titlerunning{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli chcesz użyć któregoś z tych poleceń, to musisz wpisać je sam.
|
||
I nie zapomnij wpisywać je w trybie LaTeX-a!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wstawki -- rysunki i tabele
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX obsługuje niezbędne środowiska wstawek
|
||
\family sans
|
||
figure, figure*, table
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
table*
|
||
\family default
|
||
, dlatego nie wspominamy o nich tutaj więcej.
|
||
Zajrzyj do
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręcznika Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
Pamiętaj, że tabele powinny być wyrównane lewostronnie.
|
||
Do tego celu wybierz tabelę i zmień wyrównanie w
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
A
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kapit.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jest tylko jedna specjalna rzecz: rysunki z podpisami.
|
||
Aby utworzyć takie rysunki musisz wykonać poniższe kroki:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Utwórz szeroką wstawkę:
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
stawki\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
R
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ysunek(wide)
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Wpisz treść podpisu rysunku.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Naciśnij
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Enter
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby przesunąć kursor powyżej podpisu,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Wstaw swój rysunek (eps),
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Ustaw kursor za rysunkiem i wstaw odstęp poziomy:
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
staw\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
Z
|
||
\bar default
|
||
nak specjalny
|
||
\bar under
|
||
\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
H
|
||
\bar default
|
||
Fill
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Przełącz się do trybu LaTeX:
|
||
\family sans
|
||
M-c
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
t
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Wpisz:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
parbox[b]{55mm}{
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\series bold
|
||
Nie zamykaj nawiasu!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Ustaw kursor za podpisem, przełącz się do trybu LaTeX-a i wstaw brakujący
|
||
nawias
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
,,}
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zobacz także rysunek w przykładowym artykule.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Szablon referatu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
For submission, the paper has to be formated in a special double-spacing
|
||
layout.
|
||
For this purpose, you have to give the option
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
referee
|
||
\family default
|
||
to the documentclass.
|
||
This must be done using the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
E
|
||
\bar under
|
||
x
|
||
\bar default
|
||
tra
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Options
|
||
\family default
|
||
field in the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Document
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
popup.
|
||
Just enter the string
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
referee
|
||
\family default
|
||
there.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Przykład
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W folderze
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Examples
|
||
\family default
|
||
znajduje się plik przykładowy artykuł napisany w LyX-ie.
|
||
To jest przykład z oryginalnago pakietu makr Springera przetłumaczonego
|
||
do LyX-a.
|
||
Użyj go jako inspirację i porównanie oryginalnego kodu LaTeX-a z LyX-owym
|
||
sposobem pisania.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
AASTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Mike Ressler
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
AASTeX jest zestawem makr wydanych przez American Astronomical Society dla
|
||
ułatwienia wysyłania elektronicznych manuskryptów do trzech pism wydawanych
|
||
przez Towarzystwo:
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Astrophysical Journal
|
||
\emph default
|
||
(włączając Listy i Suplement),
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Astronomical Journal
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Publications of the Astronomical Society of the Pacific
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
LyX wymaga co najmniej wersji 5.0 tych makr.
|
||
Wersje starsze od 5.0 są przeznaczone dla LaTeX2.09 i są niekompatybilne
|
||
z LyX-em.
|
||
Pakiet AASTeX można pobrać z serwera ftp AAS
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace medskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
ftp://ftp.aas.org/pubs
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace medskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
A complete user guide is contained in that package and you should familiarize
|
||
yourself with it thoroughly before embarking on writing a paper in LyX.
|
||
LyX will not reduce the need to figure out all the AASTeX commands, it
|
||
will only reduce the drudgery of typing everything in.
|
||
It is your responsibility to ensure that the final exported LaTeX document
|
||
conforms completely to the requirements of the journal to which you are
|
||
submitting your paper.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Starting a New Paper
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
I strongly suggest that you start with the AASTeX template file.
|
||
Click on
|
||
\family sans
|
||
File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
New from template
|
||
\family default
|
||
, enter the new file name, then choose the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
aastex.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
template.
|
||
This will show the most common fields found in a manuscript.
|
||
Simply overwrite the existing text (including the brackets,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
<>
|
||
\family default
|
||
) with the correct information.
|
||
Many of the AASTeX commands and environments can be implemented directly
|
||
in LyX, but some cannot: most noticeably
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
altaffilmark
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
altaffiltext
|
||
\family default
|
||
, which should stick out like a sore thumb if you actually just opened the
|
||
template file.
|
||
For commands such as these, the LaTeX code must be entered directly and
|
||
marked as such.
|
||
Such commands are referred to as ERT, or Evil Red Text.
|
||
I tried to minimize the amount of ERT needed in an AASTeX document, but
|
||
there is still more required than any of us would like.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Finishing Your Paper
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
When the paper is finished to your satisfaction and previews/prints correctly,
|
||
there are a few
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
postprocessing
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
actions which need to be done before you submit it to the journals.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Export your paper as a LaTeX file (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Export\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
as LateX
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Edit the resulting
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
file with your favorite text editor
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
remove the comment lines before the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
documentclass
|
||
\family default
|
||
command
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
remove the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage...{fontenc}
|
||
\family default
|
||
line if it appears (usually just after
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
documentclass
|
||
\family default
|
||
}; also remove the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
secnumdepth
|
||
\family default
|
||
line if it appears.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
remove everything between (and including) the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
makeatletter
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
makeatother
|
||
\family default
|
||
commands, except for any commands you specifically put into the LaTeX preamble
|
||
(which should appear immediately after the
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
User specified LaTeX commands
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
comment in the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
file).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
search for any
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
figcaption
|
||
\family default
|
||
commands and replace
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
FileName
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
with the correct, real file name.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
alter any
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
cite
|
||
\family default
|
||
commands, if necessary (see section
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "cite"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
below).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Run the resulting file through LaTeX to make sure it still processes correctly.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Reread the journal requirements to make sure your filenames and formats
|
||
are correct.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Submit it.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Comments On Specific Commands
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
I will not describe the detailed usage of the individual AASTeX commands:
|
||
the AASTeX User Guide (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
aasguide.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
) gives a good description of each.
|
||
Thus it's probably easiest for me to go down the list as found in the guide
|
||
and offer comments where necessary.
|
||
So let's begin \SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Things that work as expected
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{sloppypar}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Because they work as you might expect, I simply list them and the section
|
||
they are found in:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
documentclass
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.1.1),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{document}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.2),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
title
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.3),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
author
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.3),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
affil
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.3),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
abstract
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.4),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
keywords
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.5),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
section
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.7),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
subsection
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.7),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
subsubsection
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.7),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
paragraph
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.7),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{displaymath}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.11),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{equation}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.11),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{eqnarray}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.11),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{mathletters}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.11),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{thebibliography}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.12.1),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
bibitem
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.12.2),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{table}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.4),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{tabular}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.4),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
caption
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.4),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
label
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.4, amongst other places),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
tablerefs
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.5),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
tablecomments
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.5),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
url
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.15.4),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{document}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.16).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The following style options also work correctly:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
preprint
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
preprint2
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
eqsecnum
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
flushrt
|
||
\family default
|
||
(3, 3.1, 3.2).
|
||
Simply put them in
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Extra Options
|
||
\family default
|
||
box in
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Layout\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Document
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{sloppypar}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Things that work, but require more comment
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The following items work, but require a little more discussion:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
These items are reserved for use by the journal editors, but you can put
|
||
them into the LaTeX preamble if you feel compelled to do so:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
received
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
revised
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
accepted
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ccc
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
cpright
|
||
\family default
|
||
(all from 2.1.3)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
These items may be placed in the LaTeX preamble, and are included as blanks
|
||
in the template file:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
slugcomment
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.1.4),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
shorttitle
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.1.5),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
shortauthors
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.1.5)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
email
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.3) -- can only be used
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
standalone
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, not in the middle of a paragraph.
|
||
Use ERT if you need to embed it.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
and
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.3) -- will have extra {} after it.
|
||
This should not cause an error.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
notetoeditor
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.6) -- can only be used
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
standalone
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, not in the middle of a paragraph.
|
||
Use ERT if you need to embed it.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
placetable
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.8) -- can't insert a cross-reference tag, you must type the tag name
|
||
by hand
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
placefigure
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.8) -- same as for
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
placetable
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
acknowledgements
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.9) -- will have extra {} after it.
|
||
This should not cause an error.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
appendix
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.10) -- will have extra {} after it.
|
||
This should not cause an error.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
figcaption
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.13.2) -- you will have to edit the optional argument by hand in the final
|
||
LaTeX file.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Things not implemented, use ERT
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{sloppypar}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
altaffilmark
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.3),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
altaffiltext
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.3),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
eqnum
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.11),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setcounter{equation}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.11),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citet
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.12),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citep
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.12), Journal name abbreviations (2.12.4),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
figurenum
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.13.1),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
epsscale
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.13.1),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
plotone
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.13.1),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
plottwo
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.13.1),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
tablenum
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.4),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
tableline
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.4, insert it as the first element in the lefthand cell after where
|
||
you want it.
|
||
Don't use any of LyX's rules in the table),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
tablenotemark
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.5),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
tablenotetext
|
||
\family default
|
||
(2.14.5), most everything in Misc (2.15, except
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
url
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
email
|
||
\family default
|
||
; see above),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
singlespace
|
||
\family default
|
||
(3.1),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
doublespace
|
||
\family default
|
||
(3.1),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onecolumn
|
||
\family default
|
||
(3.2),
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
twocolumn
|
||
\family default
|
||
(3.2)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{sloppypar}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Things that cannot be implemented
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
at least in any meaningful sort of way, so I suggest ignoring them.
|
||
They are the references environment (2.12.3), and the deluxetable environment
|
||
(2.14).
|
||
If you really, really need to use deluxetable, I suggest editing it in
|
||
a separate file with a text editor, then using
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Include File
|
||
\family default
|
||
to include it in your LyX document.
|
||
See the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
aas_sample.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
file to see an example of this.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
FAQs, Tips, Tricks, and Other Ruminations
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Getting LyX and AASTeX to cooperate
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
It can be a bit tricky to get LyX to recognize a new layout and document
|
||
class.
|
||
When all else fails, do this:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Make certain that LaTeX can find AASTeX.
|
||
Copy sample.tex (and perhaps table.tex) from the AASTeX distribution into
|
||
a directory completely unrelated to LaTeX or AASTeX and run LaTeX on
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
sample.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Make certain that
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
aastex.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
appears in
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
/usr/.../share/lyx/layouts
|
||
\family default
|
||
or
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
~/.lyx/layouts
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Rerun
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Options\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Reconfigure
|
||
\family default
|
||
in LyX, then restart LyX.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Open a regular new file, not from a template.
|
||
Does AASTeX appear in
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Layout\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Class
|
||
\family default
|
||
?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
If you get a warning from an existing AASTeX document about not being able
|
||
to find the AASTeX layout or a message about
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
You should not mix title layouts with normal ones
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, things haven't been installed correctly.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
LaTeX error processing a table
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX, by default, attempts to center the table caption/title.
|
||
This seems to produce a bad interaction in AASTeX so you should click somewhere
|
||
in the caption/title, then select
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Layout\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Paragraph
|
||
\family default
|
||
, then set the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Alignment
|
||
\family default
|
||
to
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Block
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
This took care of it for me.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
References
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "cite"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
A few things: 1) I have noticed some funny spacing in the reference entries
|
||
in the text.
|
||
When you enter the bibliography item data, make sure their is
|
||
\emph on
|
||
no
|
||
\emph default
|
||
space between the last author and the parenthesis setting off the year;
|
||
\emph on
|
||
e.g.
|
||
\emph default
|
||
type
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Ressler(1992)
|
||
\family default
|
||
, not
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Ressler (1992)
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
2) I am really unhappy that I can't make
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citet
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citep
|
||
\family default
|
||
more automatic, but that would require changes to the LyX source code.
|
||
For now you can do one of two things: a) enter all your citations using
|
||
the built-in
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Citation Reference
|
||
\family default
|
||
mechanism; at least you can take advantage of the automatic insertions.
|
||
Then edit the exported LaTeX file by hand changing the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
cite
|
||
\family default
|
||
entries to the appropriate
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citet
|
||
\family default
|
||
or
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citep
|
||
\family default
|
||
commands before you submit it (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
cite
|
||
\family default
|
||
is currently equivalent to
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citet
|
||
\family default
|
||
, so you wouldn't necessarily have to change those).
|
||
Or b) you can simply enter all your citations as ERT using the same key
|
||
for the argument that you used in the bibliography popup,
|
||
\emph on
|
||
e.g.
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
\emph default
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citet{key}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Neither choice is pleasant, but until LyX's citation mechanism understands
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
natbib
|
||
\family default
|
||
, we'll have to put up with it.
|
||
3) Entering the references at all is not obvious.
|
||
The easiest thing is to start typing your first reference at the end of
|
||
the document, then mark it as type
|
||
\family sans
|
||
References
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
That will put a small gray box in front of what you just typed.
|
||
Click on the box to fill in the rest of the information.
|
||
For new references, go to the end of an existing reference and press return.
|
||
That will create a new line with its own box, etc.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Włączanie plików EPS
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
With all due respect to Chris Biemesderfer and the others who have helped
|
||
to write the AASTeX package, the figure handling mechanism smells really
|
||
foul.
|
||
You can insert the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
plotone
|
||
\family default
|
||
, etc.
|
||
commands as ERT into a Figure Float box, but I never have much luck getting
|
||
the layout right.
|
||
My advice would be to avoid all EPS inclusions in the manuscript you submit
|
||
to the journal, but then use the standard LyX EPS file inclusion mechanism
|
||
when you want to make your nicer looking preprints.
|
||
LyX will insert a
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{graphics}
|
||
\family default
|
||
command into the LaTeX preamble and handle the figures in the standard
|
||
LaTeX2e way.
|
||
Anyone who attempts to print your AASTeX 5.0 manuscript must have a LaTeX2e
|
||
installation anyway, so why not take advantage of the infinitely better
|
||
graphics handling mechanism? If they complain about LaTeX2e or the graphics
|
||
package, point out that it appears in the second edition of Lamport (1994),
|
||
so it was time to upgrade six years ago.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Things I could have done, but didn't
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
There are a few ,,pretty'' things I could have implemented, but chose not
|
||
to.
|
||
For instance, I saw no point in double-spacing the text in the LyX window,
|
||
even though it is double-spaced in the paper manuscript.
|
||
Also, I chose not to make separate layouts for the preprint and preprint2
|
||
styles.
|
||
Since I assume you will spend most of your time in the plain manuscript
|
||
mode anyway, I decided not to chew up more disk space with this.
|
||
If you feel strongly that I should make such layouts, I will adhere to
|
||
the spirit of the rules laid out by the Mudgeeraba Creek Emu-Riding and
|
||
Boomerang-Throwing Association:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quotation
|
||
,,Decisions of the judges will be final unless shouted down by a really
|
||
overwhelming majority of the crowd present.
|
||
Abusive and obscene language may not be used by contestants when addressing
|
||
members of the judging panel, or, conversely, by members of the judging
|
||
panel when addressing contestants (unless struck by a boomerang)''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Final Caveat
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
To mangle the infamous quote by Donald Knuth about a computer algorithm,
|
||
,,I have only proved this to be correct, I have not actually tried it''.
|
||
I believe following the above procedures will produce an acceptable AASTeX
|
||
document, but as of this update (Jan 25, 2000), I have not yet submitted
|
||
a paper using it.
|
||
Hopefully in the next few months \SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
ijmpd
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Panayotis Papasotiriou
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Overview
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The ijmpd package is a set of macros that facilitates electronic manuscript
|
||
submission to the
|
||
\emph on
|
||
International Journal of Modern Physics D
|
||
\emph default
|
||
published by World Scientific.
|
||
The name of the document class is
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ws-ijmpd.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
This file, together with instructions for the authors, can be downloaded
|
||
from the site
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
http://www.worldscinet.com/ijmpd/mkt/guidelines.shtml
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
The ijmpd package is a modified version of the standard
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
article
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
package.
|
||
Most of its features are supported by LyX.
|
||
I have recently used LyX successfully to write an article submitted to
|
||
the
|
||
\emph on
|
||
International Journal of Modern Physics D
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Writing a paper
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
As usual, the easiest way to write a paper is to start with a template.
|
||
Click on
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
F
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ile\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
New from
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
T
|
||
\bar default
|
||
emplate
|
||
\family default
|
||
, then choose the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ijmpd.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
template.
|
||
This will give an (almost) empty document that includes the most common
|
||
fields found in a manuscript.
|
||
Simply overwrite the existing text (including the brackets,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
<>
|
||
\family default
|
||
) with the correct information.
|
||
You should keep in mind the following remarks.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
LyX won't let you change the font size and the page style of the document,
|
||
because the ijmpd package does not allow such modifications.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
The ijmpd package requires that the language of the document should not
|
||
be changed.
|
||
Before previewing your paper, be sure that the babel package is not used.
|
||
To do this, click on
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
E
|
||
\bar default
|
||
dit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
references
|
||
\family default
|
||
, select the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Language
|
||
\family default
|
||
tab (under the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Lang Opts
|
||
\family default
|
||
tab), then deselect the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
se babel
|
||
\family default
|
||
option and click on
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
A
|
||
\bar default
|
||
pply
|
||
\family default
|
||
(or
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Save
|
||
\family default
|
||
, if you wish to make this change permanent).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Two new environments, named
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Theorem
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
and
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Proof
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
are available (their use is obvious).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Appendices may be added to the paper.
|
||
LyX offers a special environment, called
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Appendix
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
which marks the beginning of the appendix.
|
||
An appendix can contain normal sections, subsections, or subsubsections.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
The ijmpd package implements table captions quite differently than LyX does.
|
||
As a result, a table created by LyX is printed correctly, but its caption
|
||
is ignored.
|
||
If you need table captions, you should implement the whole table float
|
||
in a
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
file, then include this file to the LyX document (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
I
|
||
\bar default
|
||
nsert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Inclu
|
||
\bar under
|
||
d
|
||
\bar default
|
||
e file
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
Details on how to create an ijmpd table float can be found in the file
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ws-ijmpd.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
, which is included in the ijmpd package.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Preparing a paper for submission
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Before you submit your paper you must export the LyX document as a LaTeX
|
||
file (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
F
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ile\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
E
|
||
\bar default
|
||
xport\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
L
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ateX
|
||
\family default
|
||
), then make the following changes to the resulting
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
file.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Remove the comment lines before the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
documentclass
|
||
\family default
|
||
command.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Remove everything between (and including) the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
makeatletter
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
makeatother
|
||
\family default
|
||
commands, except for any commands you specifically put into the LaTeX preamble.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The modified
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
file should be saved and processed through LaTeX as many times as necessary.
|
||
You may also want to check the resulting
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.dvi
|
||
\family default
|
||
document.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Use of ERT
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Użycie wstawek ERT jest opcjonalne i jest zredukowane do trzech poleceń,
|
||
which affect the look of the page.
|
||
If you started writing your paper by using the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ijmpd.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
template, the ERT needed is already in its place; you usually don't need
|
||
to delete it.
|
||
You may only change the first ERT to specify the information printed to
|
||
the top of odd and even pages (authors' names and short paper's title,
|
||
respectively).
|
||
This ERT must have the form
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
markboth{Authors' Names}{Short Paper's Title}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Kluwer
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Panayotis Papasotiriou
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Przegląd
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pakiet Kluwer jest zestawem makr wydanych przez Kluwer Academic Publishers
|
||
aby ułatwić elektroniczną wysyłkę manuskryptów do pism wydawanych przez
|
||
wydawnictwo.
|
||
Najbardziej znane z nich (at least in my domain of interest), to
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Astrophysics and Space Science
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Solar Physics
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, ale istnieje wiele innych (zobacz kompletną listę pod adresem
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
http://www.wkap.nl/jrnllist.htm/JRNLHOME
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
).
|
||
Pakiet Kluwer można pobrać z serwisu
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
http://www.wkap.nl/kaphtml.htm/STYLEFILES
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Kompletna dokumentacja jest zawarta w pakiecie (ale można pobrać ją oddzielnie).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX obsługuje wiele cech pakietu ale nie wszystkie.
|
||
Mimo to wstawki ERT są potrzebne do redukcji ,,osobliwych'' poleceń pakietu
|
||
(zobacz
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "subsec:kluwer_peculiarities"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
).
|
||
Ja ostatnio napisałem bez żadnych problemów artykuł wysłany do pisma
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Astrophysics and Space Science
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Pisanie artykułów
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Najłatwiejszą drogą do napisania nowego artykułu jest skorzystanie z szablonu.
|
||
Wybierz polecenie z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Plik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Nowy z szablonu
|
||
\family default
|
||
, a następnie wybierz plik szablonu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
kluwer.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Otrzymasz wówczas (prawie) pusty dokument, który zawiera większość pól
|
||
z manuskryptu z krótkim opisem ich użycia.
|
||
I jak w większości szablonów zastąp istniejące teksty (włączając nawiasy
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
<>
|
||
\family default
|
||
) poprawnymi informacjami.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Przygotowanie artykułu do wysłania
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Podobnie jak przy pakiecie AASTeX przed wysyłką artykułu do wydawnictwa,
|
||
artykuł należy przetworzyć, co opisano dalej w kolejnych krokach:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Wyeksportuj artykuł do pliku LaTeX.
|
||
Zrób to przez wybór polecenia z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
E
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ksportuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
L
|
||
\bar default
|
||
aTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Wyedytuj uzyskany plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
w edytorze tekstowym dokonując następujących zmian:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
usuń wiersze komentarza przed poleceniem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
documentclass
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
usuń wszystko pomiędzy dyrektywami
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
makeatletter
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
makeatother
|
||
\family default
|
||
włącznie, z wyjątkiem Twoich specyficznych poleceń wstawionych do preambuły.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zapisz uzyskany plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Przetwórz plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
przez LaTeX tyle razy ile potrzeba (zwykle do trzech razy).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Zobacz utworzony plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.dvi
|
||
\family default
|
||
korzystając z przeglądarki np.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
xdvi
|
||
\family default
|
||
i sprawdź czy wszystko jest ok (tak powinno być jeśli nie popełniłeś błędów).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
,,Osobliwości'' pakietu Kluwer
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "subsec:kluwer_peculiarities"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pakiet Kluwer posiada następujące ,,osobliwości'':
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Jest możliwe pisanie wielu artykułów w tym samym pliku LaTeX-a
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Nie mogę wyobrazić sobie innego dobrego powodu aby to zrobić
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Każdy artykuł musi być zawarty w środowisku ,,article''.
|
||
Niestety, tego środowiska nie można pominąć, nawet jeśli piszemy tylko
|
||
jeden artykuł.
|
||
Dlatego każdy artykuł zaczyna się poleceniem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{article}
|
||
\family default
|
||
i kończy oczywiście poleceniem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{article}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Mimo to można to zaimplementować w LyX-ie, ale ja nie dołączam tego, od
|
||
czasu jak to wygląda brzydko i może peszyć nowych użytkowników.
|
||
Dlatego Ty potrzebujesz wpisać te polecenia wprost jako kod LaTeX (jako
|
||
wstawki ERT).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Informacje podane na początku artykułu (np.: title, subtitle, author, institution
|
||
, running title, running author, abstract i keywords) muszą znajdować się
|
||
w
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
środowisku ,,opening''.
|
||
Tego nie zaimplementowano w LyX-ie, tak że Ty musisz umieścić title, subtitle
|
||
itd.
|
||
pomiędzy dwoma wstawkami ERT (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{opening}
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{opening}
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Według podręcznika użytkownika etykieta każdej pozycji bibliografii musi
|
||
być zapisana jako
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
protect
|
||
\backslash
|
||
citeauthoryear{
|
||
\family default
|
||
\emph on
|
||
author(s)
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
\emph default
|
||
}{
|
||
\family default
|
||
\emph on
|
||
year
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
\emph default
|
||
}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Szablon
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
kluwer.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
zajmuje się tymi wszystkimi ,,osobliwościami'' Jeśli zaczynasz z nowym
|
||
artykułem korzystając z tego szablonu, to nie potrzebujesz robić nic specjalneg
|
||
o.
|
||
Tylko:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
nie usuwaj wstawek ERT dołączonych do szablonu i
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
skopiuj przykładową bibliografię dołączona do szablonu i dostosuj ją przez
|
||
dopisanie nowych pozycji.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Koma-Script
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Bernd Rellermeyer
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Przegląd
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX-owe klasy dokumentu
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
,
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
,
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book(koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
letter(koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
odpowiadają LaTeX-owym klasom odpowiednio
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrartcl.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrreprt.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrbook.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
, i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrlettr.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
, z rodziny Koma-Script.
|
||
Zastępują one standardowe klasy dokumentu odpowiednio
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
article.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
report.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
book.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
, i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
letter.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
, i są bliższe europejskim konwencjom typograficznym
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Standardową wielkością czcionki jest 11pt w
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
,
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, oraz 12pt w
|
||
\emph on
|
||
letter (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Tytularia, etykiety opisu środowisk i kilka elementów klasy
|
||
\emph on
|
||
letter (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
są składane czcionką półgrubą bezszeryfową
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Istnieje duża różnica pomiędzy starymi półgrubymi czcionkami bezszeryfowymi
|
||
rodziny cm, a nowymi rodziny ec, szczególnie w wyglądzie tytulariów.
|
||
Dla porównania półgruba czcionka bezszeryfowa rodziny ec wygląda na troszkę
|
||
cieńszą.
|
||
Pakiet LaTeX-a
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
cmsd.sty
|
||
\family default
|
||
autorstwa
|
||
\shape smallcaps
|
||
Walter Schmidta
|
||
\shape default
|
||
pomaga tworzyć ,,zwykły'' wygląd przy użyciu czcionek ec.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Numeracja tytułów rozdziałów jest zrobiona tak samo jak numeracja sekcji,
|
||
czyli bez wiersza ,,Rozdział\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
''.
|
||
Ponadto wygląd tytulariów może być zmieniony za pomocą kilku opcji (w LyX-ie
|
||
wprowadza się je w polach
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opcje Dodatkowe
|
||
\family default
|
||
wywołanym z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
okument
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Głównym zamierzeniem projektowania obszaru pisania klas dokumentu Koma-Script
|
||
są opcje
|
||
\family sans
|
||
BCOR
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
DIV
|
||
\family default
|
||
(w LyX-ie wprowadza się je w polach
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opcje Dodatkowe
|
||
\family default
|
||
wywołanym z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
okument
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
Dzięki nim mamy klarowną możliwość zmiany szerokości marginesów jako opcje
|
||
w menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
okument
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Klasy LaTeX-owe rodziny Koma-Script definiują kilka dodatkowych poleceń.
|
||
Część z nich, które mają sens w LyX-ie są zaimplementowane w odpowiednich
|
||
środowiskach.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Szczegółowy opis (w języku niemieckim) LaTeX-owych klas dokumentu rodziny
|
||
Koma-Script można znaleźć w dokumentacji Koma-Script
|
||
\emph on
|
||
scrguide
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Istnieje angielskie tłumaczenie --
|
||
\emph on
|
||
screnggu
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, ale nie jest kompletne
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\emph default
|
||
Dalsze punkty opisują tylko te aspekty, które są związane z LyX-em.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Klasy article (koma-script), report (koma-script) i book (koma-script)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Klasy dokumentu
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
,
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book(koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
są zaimplementowane w plikach układu, odpowiednio:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrartcl.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrreprt.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrbook.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Zawierają one wszystkie środowiska odpowiednich standardowych klas dokumentu
|
||
odpowiednio
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article
|
||
\emph default
|
||
,
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, częściowo zmienione z wyłączeniem LyX-owego środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
List
|
||
\family default
|
||
, które jest zastąpione przez nowe środowisko
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Labeling
|
||
\family default
|
||
o takiej samej funkcji.
|
||
Jednak środowisko
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Labeling
|
||
\family default
|
||
zostało dodane do kilku nowych środowisk, ale nie są one częścią klasy
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
letter (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addchap
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addsec
|
||
\family default
|
||
: są odpowiednikami dla
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Chapter*
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Section*
|
||
\family default
|
||
, dodatkowo dają wpis do spisu treści.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addchap
|
||
\family default
|
||
nie istnieje w klasie
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addchap*
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addsec*
|
||
\family default
|
||
: zachowują się dokładnie tak jak
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addchap
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addsec
|
||
\family default
|
||
, additionally clearing running heads.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addchap*
|
||
\family default
|
||
nie istnieje w klasie
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Minisec
|
||
\family default
|
||
: generuje tytuł tuż nad następnym akapitem w standardowej wielkości czcionki
|
||
bez wpływu na strukturę dokumentu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Następujące środowiska, razem ze standardowymi:
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
, tworzą stronę tytułową dokumentu.
|
||
Muszą być wstawione na początku pierwszego ,,normalnego'' akapitu
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Odpowiednie polecenia LaTeX muszą pojawić się przed poleceniem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
maketitle
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Gdy dane środowisko jest użyte częściej niż jeden raz, to zostanie uwzględnione
|
||
tylko ostatnie jego wystąpienie w tekście.
|
||
Te dodatkowe środowiska, podobnie jak
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
, nie wpływają na wygląd tworzonego dokumentu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Subject
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy wyśrodkowany akapit powyżej podstawowego tytułu (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
) z tematem dokumentu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Publishers
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy wyśrodkowany akapit poniżej podstawowego tytułu (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
) z nazwą wydawcy.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Dedication
|
||
\family default
|
||
: w klasach
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
tworzy wyśrodkowany akapit z dedykacją na oddzielnej stronie za stroną
|
||
tytułową, a w klasie
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
tworzy wyśrodkowany akapit z dedykacją poniżej podstawowego tytułu (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Titlehead
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy wyrównany do lewej powyżej podstawowego tytułu (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
) dla nagłówka dokumentu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Uppertitleback
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy w druku dwustronnym w klasach
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
na tyle strony tytułowej u góry wyrównany do lewej akapit, a w przypadku
|
||
druku jednostronnego lub klasy
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
nie jest składane.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Lowertitleback
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy w druku dwustronnym w klasach
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
na tyle strony tytułowej u dołu wyrównany do lewej akapit, a w przypadku
|
||
druku jednostronnego lub klasy
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
nie jest składane.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Extratitle
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy specjalną ,,brudną'' stronę na początku dokumentu zawierającą akapit
|
||
bez specjalnego formatowania.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pliki układu dla klas dokumentu
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
,
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
włączają plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrmacros.inc
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Który jest właściwym miejscem do definiowania własnych środowisk.
|
||
Skopiuj
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrmacros.inc
|
||
\family default
|
||
do swojego osobistego foldera układów i wyedytuj go!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Klasa letter (koma-script)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{sloppypar}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\noindent
|
||
Klasa dokumentu
|
||
\emph on
|
||
letter (koma-script)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
jest zaimplementowana w pliku układu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
scrlettr.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Zawiera on wszystkie środowiska odpowiadające standardowej klasie
|
||
\emph on
|
||
letter
|
||
\emph default
|
||
, częściowo zmienione z wyłączeniem LyX-owych środowisk
|
||
\family sans
|
||
List
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Comment
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LyX
|
||
\family default
|
||
-
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Code
|
||
\family default
|
||
, które są zastąpione przez nowe środowisko
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Labeling
|
||
\family default
|
||
o takiej samej funkcji.
|
||
Ponadto zawiera, w odróżnieniu od standardowej klasy, standardowe środowiska
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Quotation
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Quote
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Verse
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Dodatkowo jest kilka nowych specyficznych środowisk.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{sloppypar}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wygląd listu złożonego w tej klasie dokumentu może być sterowany za pomocą
|
||
kilku poleceń LaTeX-a (w LyX-ie można je wprowadzić wybierając z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
reambuła LaTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
)
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Na przykład, standardowy wygląd nagłówka listu zawierający nazwę i adres
|
||
jest całkowicie self-willed.
|
||
,,Podstawowy'' nagłówek jest tworzony za pomocą następujących poleceń w
|
||
preambule:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
firsthead{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
parbox[b]{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
textwidth}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ignorespaces
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fromname
|
||
\backslash
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ignorespaces
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fromaddress}}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
nexthead{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
parbox[b]{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
textwidth}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ignorespaces
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fromname
|
||
\backslash
|
||
hfill
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ignorespaces
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pagename
|
||
\backslash
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thepage}}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Dzięki temu autor listu może utworzyć swój własny układ.
|
||
Szczegółowy opis (w języku niemieckim) LaTeX-owych klas dokumentu rodziny
|
||
Koma-Script można znaleźć w dokumentacji Koma-Script
|
||
\emph on
|
||
scrguide
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Letter
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opening
|
||
\family default
|
||
definiują początek listu i muszą być użyte w każdym liście.
|
||
Dla podkreślenia ich w dokumencie, są zaznaczone literami odpowiednio
|
||
\family sans
|
||
L
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub
|
||
\family sans
|
||
O
|
||
\family default
|
||
na lewym marginesie.
|
||
To umożliwia napisanie dowolnej liczby listów w jednym pliku.
|
||
Środowisko
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opening
|
||
\family default
|
||
tworzy nowy list używając tego samego adresu, a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Letter
|
||
\family default
|
||
tworzy nowy adres.
|
||
Środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Closing
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
PS
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CC
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Encl
|
||
\family default
|
||
są podstawowymi środowiskami i mogą być używane wielokrotnie w tym samym
|
||
liście.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Letter
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy akapit na adres i definiuje początek listu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opening
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy akapit dla adresu i zaczyna nowy list.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Closing
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy akapit na tekst zamykający list.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
PS
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy akapit na Postscriptum.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CC
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy akapit na listę rozdzielnika (Do wiadomości).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Encl
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tworzy akapit dla załączników.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Name
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Signature
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Address
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Telephone
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Place
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Backaddress
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Specialmail
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Location
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Subject
|
||
\family default
|
||
wyświetlają etykiety, dla ułatwienia wpisywania, których zawartość jest
|
||
przetwarzana przez klasę letter (Koma-Script)
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
It could be seen as a matter of inconsequence, that the types
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Letter
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opening
|
||
\family default
|
||
described above are not such input types as well.
|
||
Because of the special meaning of those types, however, I have implemented
|
||
them as ordinary paragraph types with a one letter mark in the left margin.
|
||
Moreover, it would affect my feeling of symmetry, if the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opening
|
||
\family default
|
||
type and the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Closing
|
||
\family default
|
||
type had such a serious different appearance.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Te środowiska muszą być użyte na początku odpowiedniego środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opening
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Implementacja tych środowisk w trybie WYSIWYG nie ma sensu, ponieważ rzeczywisty
|
||
wygląd złożonego listu zależy nie tylko od użycia właściwego środowiska,
|
||
ale także innych czynników.
|
||
Na przykład podpis wprowadzony w środowisku
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Signature
|
||
\family default
|
||
będzie pojawiał się tylko w liście, w którym użyto środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Closing
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Zawartość środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Telephone
|
||
\family default
|
||
standardowo nie będzie pojawiać się przy wszystkich złożonych listach.
|
||
Możliwość projektowania wolnych nagłówków listu jest już wspomniana w przypisie
|
||
powyżej.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Środowiska mogą być także używane jako puste akapity.
|
||
To ma sens np.
|
||
dla środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Signature
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jeśli środowisko
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Signature
|
||
\family default
|
||
nie zostało w ogóle użyte, to standardowo jest zastępowane zawartością
|
||
środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Name
|
||
\family default
|
||
, ale jeśli mamy puste środowisko
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Signature
|
||
\family default
|
||
to nie jest niczym zastępowane.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Przez użycie środowisk można utworzyć szablon listu, z częściowo wypełnionymi
|
||
polami środowisk (np.
|
||
Name, Address itd).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Name
|
||
\family default
|
||
: nazwa nadawcy, standardowo pojawia się jako wyśrodkowany akapit w nagłówku
|
||
listu.
|
||
Tekst pisany jest dużymi literami.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Signature
|
||
\family default
|
||
: podpis nadawcy, standardowo pojawia się poniżej treści środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Closing
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jeśli nie użyto środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Signature
|
||
\family default
|
||
to zamiast niego pojawia się zawartość
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Name
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Address
|
||
\family default
|
||
: adres nadawcy, standardowo pojawia się jako wyśrodkowany akapit w nagłówku
|
||
listu, poniżej nazwy nadawcy.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Telephone
|
||
\family default
|
||
: numer telefonu nadawcy, pojawia się tylko, gdy jest włączona zmienna LaTeX
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
telephonenum
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Place
|
||
\family default
|
||
: miejsce napisania listu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
: data napisania listu.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Place
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
standardowo składane są w wierszu poniżej pola adresu nadawcy wyrównane
|
||
do prawej.
|
||
Jeśli środowisko
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
jest puste, to zawartość środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Place
|
||
\family default
|
||
nie pojawi się.
|
||
Jeśli nie użyto środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
, to domyślnie pobierana jest data składu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Backaddress
|
||
\family default
|
||
: adres zwrotny, standardowo składany jest powyżej adresu docelowego małą
|
||
czcionką bezszeryfową.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Specialmail
|
||
\family default
|
||
: uwagi dla poczty (np.
|
||
do rąk własnych), standardowo pojawiają się pomiędzy adresem zwrotnym a
|
||
docelowym, i są podkreślone.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Location
|
||
\family default
|
||
: dodatkowa informacja, standardowo pojawia się przy prawym marginesie poniżej
|
||
adresu docelowego.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
: tytuł listu, standardowo pojawia się złożony wielką i półgrubą czcionką
|
||
bezszeryfową powyżej tematu listu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Subject
|
||
\family default
|
||
: temat listu, standard złożony jest czcionką półgrubą powyżej akapitu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opening
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Yourref
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Yourmail
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Myref
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Customer
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Invoice
|
||
\family default
|
||
tworzą listy firmowe przez złożenie zawartości tych środowisk powyżej wiersza
|
||
tytułowego.
|
||
Dla pola daty używana jest zawartość środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jeśli wykorzystane jest choć jedno ze środowisk ,,biznesowych'', to zawartość
|
||
środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Place
|
||
\family default
|
||
nie jest składana, tylko ustawiana jest zmienna LaTeX
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
-
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
a
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fromplace
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
te środowiska muszą być użyte przed odpowiednim środowiskiem
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opening
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Yourref
|
||
\family default
|
||
: Wasz znak (Your ref.)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Yourmail
|
||
\family default
|
||
: Wasz list (Your letter of.)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Myref
|
||
\family default
|
||
: Nasz znak (Our ref.)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Customer
|
||
\family default
|
||
: Klient (Customer no.)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Invoice
|
||
\family default
|
||
: Nr faktury (Invoice no.)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Problemy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Przedstawienie WYSIWYG w LyX-ie dokumentów w klasie Koma-Script powoduje
|
||
kilka problemów.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Numery rozdziałów środowisk
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Chapter
|
||
\family default
|
||
są wyświetlane w wierszu powyżej tytułu rozdziału.
|
||
Taki przypadek jest spowodowany wewnętrznym przetwarzaniem przez LyX środowiska
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Counter_Chapter
|
||
\family default
|
||
w pliku układu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Tytuły środowisk
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addchap
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Addsec
|
||
\family default
|
||
są wstawione tylko do ,,prawdziwego'' LaTeX-owego spisu treści, a nie są
|
||
wyświetlane LyX-owym spisie treści (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
N
|
||
\bar default
|
||
awigacja
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Tryb separacji akapitów w dokumencie
|
||
\emph on
|
||
letter
|
||
\emph default
|
||
wyświetlany jest jako odstęp, a nie wcięcie.
|
||
To jest standardowe zachowanie, do tego nie potrzeba żadnego polecenia
|
||
LaTeX-a.
|
||
Ale w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kład\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
D
|
||
\bar default
|
||
okument
|
||
\family default
|
||
odpowiedni przełącznik wskazuje na załączony tryb
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
W
|
||
\bar default
|
||
cięcie
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Tryb
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
O
|
||
\bar default
|
||
dstęp
|
||
\family default
|
||
daje efekt po użyciu odpowiedniego polecenia LaTeX-a wstawionego do dokumentu
|
||
do wytworzenia odstępu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Springer Journals (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
svjour
|
||
\family default
|
||
)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Martin Vermeer
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Opis
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Tutaj opisujemy klasy i pliki układu używanych dla niektórych pism wydawanych
|
||
przez wydawnictwo Springer Verlag i wymienionych na stronie
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
http://www.springer.de/author/tex/help-journals.html
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, skąd powinieneś móc pobrać pliki klasy (tak, oczywiście teraz dla LaTeX2e!).
|
||
To jest modularny system: wspólne części dla wszystkich pism są zaimplementowan
|
||
e w pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
svjour.inc
|
||
\family default
|
||
, z którego korzystają specyficzne dla danego pisma pliki układu (np.:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
svjog.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
dla
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Journal of Geodesy
|
||
\emph default
|
||
) .
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Oznacza to, że implementacja wsparcia dla innego pisma wydawnictwa Springer
|
||
wymaga napisania własnego pliku układu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
sv
|
||
\family default
|
||
<myjournal>
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
na podstawie pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
svjog.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Klasa dokumentu LyX-a była testowana tylko dla pisma
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Journal of Geodesy
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
Pliki
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
svjour
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
svjog
|
||
\family default
|
||
są zawarte w standardowej dystrybucji LyX-a.
|
||
Zainstaluj pobraną z serwera wydawnictwa Springer odpowiednią klasę LaTeX-ową
|
||
w odpowiednim katalogu TeX-a, odśwież bazę pakietów TeX-a (w teTeX-u uruchom
|
||
polecenie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
texhash
|
||
\family default
|
||
, jako root jeśli jest to niezbędne), zrekonfiguruj LyX-a i powinno już
|
||
działać.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Nowe style
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Duża liczba stylów typu theorem --
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Claim, Conjecture,
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
Theorem
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Headnote, Dedication, Subtitle, Running_LaTeX_Title, Author_Running, Institute,
|
||
Mail, Offprints, Keywords, Acknowledgements, Acknowledgement
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Zobacz dokumentację do pakietu aby poznać szczegóły.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Obsługiwane pisma
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Journal of Geodesy
|
||
\emph default
|
||
:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
svjog.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
-- Martin Vermeer
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Probability Theory and Related Fields
|
||
\emph default
|
||
:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
svprobth.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
-- Jean-Marc Lasgouttes
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dodaj własne -- to nie jest trudne!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Podziękowania
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Te pliki bazują częściowo na starszym pliku układu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ejour2.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
, który bazował na starym stylu LaTeX 2.09 z wydawnictwa Springer.
|
||
Wszystko to i układ
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ejour2
|
||
\family default
|
||
teraz nie działa.
|
||
Jean-Marc Lasgouttes bardzo pomógł mi znaleźć drogę implementacji układu
|
||
w LyX-ie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Błędy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Prawdopodobne.
|
||
Ale prawdopodobnie mniej niż w starej klasie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ejour2
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ograniczenia np.: nie wyświetla numeru środowisk typu theorem, w tej chwili
|
||
#.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
AGU journals (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
aguplus
|
||
\family default
|
||
)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\shape smallcaps
|
||
Martin Vermeer
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Description
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
These are the layout files for some of the journals of the American Geophysical
|
||
Society.
|
||
It is assumed that you have both the AGU's own class files and AGUplus
|
||
installed (everything to be found at
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
http://publications.agu.org/files/2013/08/AGU-LaTeX.zip
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
New styles
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Redefined are
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Paragraph
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Paragraph*
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
They are still called this in the LyX GUI, though their LaTeX equivalents
|
||
in the AGU classes are
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Subsubsubsection
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Subsubsubsection*
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Newly defined styles are
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Left_Header
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Right_Header
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Received
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Revised
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Accepted
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CCC
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
PaperId
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
AuthorAddr
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
SlugComment
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
These are mostly manuscript attributes and defined in the AGU class documentati
|
||
on.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
I suspect this is still badly incomplete.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
New floats
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Planotable
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Plate
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
We also have a new
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Table_Caption
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Supported journals
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Journal of Geophysical Research
|
||
\emph default
|
||
:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
jgrga.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
-- Martin Vermeer
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Add your own, it isn't so hard! Look at the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
jgrga.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
example and
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
aguplus.inc
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
EGS journals (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
egs
|
||
\family default
|
||
)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\shape smallcaps
|
||
Martin Vermeer
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Description
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
This is the layout file for the European Geophysical Society journals.
|
||
The needed
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
egs.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
can be downloaded from the web site of the EGS under
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
www.copernicus.org
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
New styles
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Right_address, Latex_Title, Affil, Journal, msnumber, FirstAuthor, Received,
|
||
Accepted
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Offsets
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
The current layout file is unfortunately very unmodular and would benefit
|
||
from using the various
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
std*.inc
|
||
\family default
|
||
file inclusions.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Slides [aka
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Sli
|
||
\noun default
|
||
TeX]
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:slitex"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
John Weiss
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W tej sekcji opisujemy jak użyć LyX-a do przygotowania slajdów do rzutników.
|
||
Istnieją dwie klasy dokumentów, które można do tego celu zastosować: domyślnie
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX.
|
||
W tej sekcji opisano pierwszą z nich.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Powiem to jeszcze raz, jasno, aby nie buło nieporozumień:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
|
||
\size large
|
||
Ta sekcja dokumentu opisuje
|
||
\emph on
|
||
tylko
|
||
\emph default
|
||
klasę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,slides (default)
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli szukasz dokumentacji do
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,slides (FoilTeX)
|
||
\family default
|
||
'', zajrzyj do sekcji
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:foiltex"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Klasa
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
[
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,slides (FoilTeX)
|
||
\family default
|
||
''] jest aktualnie trochę lepsza niż domyślnie klasa
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
lub tak powtarzam za jej adwokatami.
|
||
Nigdy jej nie używałem i nie wiem czy to jest prawda czy nie.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ta klasa jest ulepszeniem LaTeX2e starego pakietu
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Sli
|
||
\noun default
|
||
TeX package.
|
||
Każda dystrybucja LaTeX2e zawiera tę klasę [którą, od teraz, będę nazywał
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
''], tak więc jesteś zmuszony ją mieć.
|
||
Jak wspomniałem wcześniej istnieją inne klasy, jak np.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
, które także tworzą slajdy do rzutnika i wykonują to zadanie lepiej niż
|
||
ta.
|
||
Jednak istnieje kilka rzeczy, które klasa
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
może zrobić, a inne nie, np.
|
||
generowanie overlays.
|
||
Czytaj dalej aby dowiedzieć się więcej!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Zaczynamy
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:slidesetup"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Oczywiście, aby użyć tej klasy dokumentu, potrzebujesz wybrać klasę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,slides (default)
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' z listy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
C
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lass
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jest kilka rzeczy, które powinieneś wiedzieć o tej klasie:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Nie zmieniaj opcji
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Strony i Page cols
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Nie są one obsługiwane przez klasę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
W oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
lista styli dostępna w polu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
agestyle
|
||
\family default
|
||
zachowuje się troszkę inaczej dla tej klasy.
|
||
Dostępne są nastepujące style:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
plain
|
||
\family default
|
||
W prawym dolnym narożniku slajdu umieszony zostanie numer slajdu,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
headings
|
||
\family default
|
||
Podobnie jak
|
||
\family sans
|
||
plain
|
||
\family default
|
||
, ale dodatkowo zostana wstawione krzyżyki w rogach folii dla dokładnego
|
||
pozycjonowania przy nakładaniu folii jedna na drugą.
|
||
To jest styl domyślny.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
empty
|
||
\family default
|
||
Nie jest dodawany numer, data ani znaczniki wyrównania.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Klasa
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
posiada dodatkową opcję:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
clock
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Aby ją użyć, wpisz ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
clock
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' w polu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opcje doda
|
||
\bar under
|
||
t
|
||
\bar default
|
||
kowe
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl dokument
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Użycie tej opcji pozwala dodać znacznik daty do
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
s.
|
||
Zobacz sekcję
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:slideNote"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
aby poznać więcej szczegółów.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz użyć szablonu ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
slides.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' aby automatycznie ustawić klasę nowego dokumentu na
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
[za pomoca polecenia
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Nowy z
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
szablonu
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby utworzyć nowy dokument].
|
||
Plik szablonu zawiera także kilka przykładów specjalnych środowisk akapitów
|
||
taj klasy.
|
||
Będzie to opisane dalej.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Środowiska akapitów
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Obsługiwane środowiska
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pierwszą rzeczą, którą powinieneś zauważyć gdy zaczynasz nowy dokument slajdów
|
||
jest rozmiar i typ czcionki: odpowiednio ,,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Largest
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' i czcionka bezszeryfowa
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Sans
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Serif
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
This is also what's used in the output.
|
||
Think of this as a
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
visual cue
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
to remind you that this is a slide.
|
||
Your final slides will use a larger font; ergo, you'll have less space.
|
||
Of course, the larger default screen font isn't WYSIWYG, only a reminder.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The next thing that becomes obvious is the changes to the paragraph environment
|
||
pull-down box [at the far-left end of the toolbar].
|
||
Most of the paragraph environments you're used to seeing are missing.
|
||
There are also four new ones.
|
||
That's because the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
class itself only supports certain paragraph environments:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Standard
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Itemize
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Enumerate
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Description
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
List
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Quotation
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Quote
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Verse
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Caption
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LyX-Code
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Comment
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wszystkie inne standardowe środowiska włączając środowiska sekcji nie są
|
||
używane w klasie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Z drugiej zaś strony zauważysz nowe środowiska:
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
In prior versions of this class, there was the mandatory
|
||
\family sans
|
||
EndAllSlides
|
||
\family default
|
||
paragraph environment.
|
||
\family sans
|
||
EndAllSlides
|
||
\family default
|
||
is deprecated; it will convert to a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Comment
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
You should probably remove it.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
These five are kind of quirky, due to a
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
feature
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
in LyX.
|
||
You see, LyX doesn't permit you to nest any other paragraph environment
|
||
into an empty environment.
|
||
Now, that's fine and dandy, but it means that you wouldn't be able to start
|
||
a slide with anything except plain text.
|
||
To deal with this, I've performed a little
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
LaTeX magic.
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Quirks of the New Environments
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:slideQuirk"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
All five of the new paragraph environments are somewhat quirky due to inherent
|
||
limitiations in the current version of LyX.
|
||
As I just mentioned, LyX forbids environments that begin with another environme
|
||
nt.
|
||
To get around this, the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
environment isn't a paragraph environment as described in the
|
||
\emph on
|
||
User's Guide
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
You should consider
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
, and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
to be ,,pseudo-environments''.
|
||
They look like a section heading or a
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Caption
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
but really begin a [and, if necessary, end the previous] paragraph environment.
|
||
Likewise, treat
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Invisible Text
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
as
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
pseudo-commands.
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
These two perform some action.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
A common feature of all five environments,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
, is a rather long-ish label.
|
||
The text following this label --- ordinarily the contents of the paragraph
|
||
environment --- is utterly irrelevant for
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
LyX completely ignores it.
|
||
In fact, you can leave these five environments completely empty.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
While you don't
|
||
\emph on
|
||
have
|
||
\emph default
|
||
to put any text after the rather long-ish label, you might want to.
|
||
This could be a short description of the contents of the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
, for example.
|
||
In that case, enter in your descriptive comment and hit
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Return
|
||
\family default
|
||
as you normally would.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
If, on the other hand, you don't want to enter in any descriptive text,
|
||
you'll hit another LyX quirk.
|
||
LyX, like nature, abhors a vacuum, and will not let you start a new paragraph
|
||
environment until you put something in the old one.
|
||
So, do this:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Start entering the text that will
|
||
\emph on
|
||
follow
|
||
\emph default
|
||
the new
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
or
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Now move to the beginning of that paragraph.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Next, hit
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Return
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Finally, change this new, empty paragraph to a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
or
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Some future version of LyX will, hopefully, resolve this quirkiness\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Tworzenie prezentacji używając
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Użycie środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
If you're expecting this section to teach you how to actually make a presentatio
|
||
n, you'll be sorely disappointed.
|
||
Naturally, I'll describe all of the ways the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
class can assist you in preparing the materials for a presentation.
|
||
Filling in the contents, however, is up to you.
|
||
[Then again, that
|
||
\emph on
|
||
is
|
||
\emph default
|
||
the LyX philosophy.]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Choosing the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
environment [in the manner described in section
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:slideQuirk"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
] tells LyX to begin a new slide [duh].
|
||
The label for this environment/
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
pseudo-command
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
is an
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
ASCII line,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
in cool blue, followed by the label,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
NewSlide:
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Any text or paragraph environments that follow this one go on the new slide.
|
||
It's that simple.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Slides are probably the only time you'll need to forcibly end pages in LyX.
|
||
In fact, you'll want to, once you finish entering the contents of one slide.
|
||
If you've entered more text than can physically fit on a slide, the extra
|
||
overflows onto a new slide.
|
||
I don't recommend doing this, however, since the overflow slide won't have
|
||
any page number on it.
|
||
Furthermore, it may interfere with any
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
you've made to accompany the oversized
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
environments work the same way as the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
environment.
|
||
They both create an
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
ASCII line
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
followed by a label [
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
NewOverlay:
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
and
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
NewNote:
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, respectively].
|
||
The color is a stunning magenta instead of blue, and the
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
ASCII line
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
will look different, in style and in length.
|
||
The label fonts of all three also differ from one another.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
As with a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
, if the contents of a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
or
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
exceed the physical size of a slide or sheet of paper, the extra will overflow
|
||
onto a new sheet.
|
||
Again, you should avoid this.
|
||
It defeats the whole purpose of
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
s and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
s.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Użycie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
ze
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The idea behind an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
is a slide that sits atop another slide.
|
||
Perhaps you wish to discuss a figure on the main
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
before displaying the text associated with it.
|
||
One way to accomplish this is tape a flap of dark paper over the part of
|
||
the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
you want to display later.
|
||
This method fails, however, if you wish to overlap one graph with another,
|
||
for example.
|
||
You would then have to fumble while speaking to align the two separate,
|
||
overlapping
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
s to align the two graphs.
|
||
The use of an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
environment in both cases makes life much easier.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Each
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
receives the page number of its
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
parent
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
, appended by
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-a
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Presumably, mutliple
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
s would have
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-a
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-b
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-c
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, etc.
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
appended to the page number of the parent
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
and the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
to each fit on a single physical slide! You should probably consider an
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
as ,,part of'' a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Indeed, the LyX
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
class provides a visual cue for this: the label at the start of an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
is shorter than that at the start of a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Lastly, when you generate printable output, you'll find alignment markers
|
||
in all four corners of both the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
page and its parent
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
These will assist you in lining up the two physical slides.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The major problem in overlaying two slides is aligning the contents of the
|
||
two transparencies.
|
||
How much space should you leave for that graph on the second slide? Worse
|
||
still, what if you want a graph and a sentence on second slide, but there
|
||
is text on the main transparency that goes in between them? You could try
|
||
and insert vertical space of the right size.
|
||
The better way is to use
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
As their names imply,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
are two command-like paragraph environments that make all subsequent text
|
||
invisible and visible, respectively.
|
||
Note from section
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:slideQuirk"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
that you don't place anything
|
||
\emph on
|
||
into
|
||
\emph default
|
||
these two environments, however.
|
||
When you create an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
, it inserts a centered, sky-blue label into the page reading
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
<Invisible Text Follows>
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
For paragraphs following this label, the parts of the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
[or
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
; it doesn't matter which] where they would be contain instead blank space.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
For
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
, the corresponding centered label is
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
<Visible Text Follows>
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
in blazing green.
|
||
Paragraphs following this label behave normally.
|
||
Note that the beginning of a new
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
, or
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
automatically shuts off an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
It's therefore not necessary to use
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
at the end of a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
By now, it should be obvious how to create overlay transparencies using
|
||
the proper combination of
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
on a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Create a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
, including everything that will appear on it, whether on the main slide
|
||
or on the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Before each figure or paragraph that will appear only on the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
, insert an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
environment.
|
||
If necessary, insert a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
environment after the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
-only text.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Start an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
immediately following the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Copy the contents of this
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
into the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Within the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
, change all of the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
lines to
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
and vice-versa.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
That's it.
|
||
You've just made an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
There's one problem with the way I've designed the LyX
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
class: you can't make text in the middle of a paragraph invisible, nor
|
||
make text in the middle of an invisible paragraph visible again.
|
||
To accomplish this feat, you'll need to use some inlined LaTeX codes.
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
The commands of interest are:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
invisible \SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
visible \SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
and need to be marked as TeX.
|
||
The text whose
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
visibility
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
you wish to change goes in between the brackets [and after the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
invisible
|
||
\family default
|
||
or
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
visible
|
||
\family default
|
||
command].
|
||
If you don't know how to mark text as TeX, see the apprpriate section of
|
||
the
|
||
\emph on
|
||
User's Guide
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Using
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
with
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:slideNote"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Like an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
, a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
is associated with a
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
parent
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Here, too, the LyX
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
class provides visual cues.
|
||
The label for a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
is shorter than that of a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
[yet longer than that of an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
] and, like the label of an
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
is shockingly magenta.
|
||
Additionally, the printed
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
has the page number of its
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
parent
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
, appended by
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-
|
||
\family default
|
||
1
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-
|
||
\family default
|
||
2
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-
|
||
\family default
|
||
3
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, etc.
|
||
You can have multiple
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
s associated with a single
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
, and, as with
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
, you'll probably want to break up long
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
s so that they fit on a single sheet of paper.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The purpose of a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
is obvious: it contains anything additional you might want to say about
|
||
a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
It could also be used as a sheet of reminders for a particular
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
In the case of the latter, you might want to make use of time markers.
|
||
Currently, the LyX
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
class has no
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
native
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
support for time markers, a
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Sli
|
||
\noun default
|
||
TeX feature.
|
||
So, you'll have to resort to using the LaTeX codes.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
To use time markers, you'll need to specify the extra class option
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
clock
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
[see section
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:slidesetup"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
].
|
||
This option turns on timing marks, which will appear in the lower-left-hand
|
||
corner of every
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
you generate.
|
||
To set what appears in the time marker, you use the LaTeX commands
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
settime{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
and
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
addtime{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
The arguments of both commands are time measured in seconds.
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
settime{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
sets the time marker to a given time.
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
addtime{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
increments the time marker by the specified amount.
|
||
Using time markers and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
s in this fashion, you can remind yourself how much time to spend on a particula
|
||
r
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
There's one last feature to describe.
|
||
Clearly, you'd like to print out all of your
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
s and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
s on transparencies while printing all of your
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
s on plain paper.
|
||
However, a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
\emph on
|
||
must
|
||
\emph default
|
||
follow the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
with which it is associated.
|
||
What's a person to do?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Luckily, there are two LaTeX commands that allow you to select what to print
|
||
out.
|
||
Both must be placed into the preamble of your document.
|
||
The command
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onlyslides{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
slides}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
will cause the output to contain only the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
s and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
s.
|
||
Correspondingly, the command
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onlynotes{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
notes}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
prevents the output of anything but
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
s.
|
||
I'd advise placing both commands in the preamble and initially comment
|
||
both out.
|
||
You can then preview your entire presentation as you write.
|
||
When you're done writing, you can then uncomment one of the two to select
|
||
what you want to print.
|
||
I like to uncomment
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onlyslides{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
slides}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, print to a file with
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
in its name, comment it back out, then uncomment
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onlynotes{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
notes}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
and print to a
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
*-notes.ps
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
file.
|
||
I can then send either file to a printer, loading transparencies or plain
|
||
paper as appropriate.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
You can also provide other arguments to the
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onlyslides{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
and
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onlynotes{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
commands.
|
||
See a good LaTeX book for details.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Plik szablonu klasy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slides
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wraz z klasą
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
dostarczyłem także plik szablonu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
slides.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Aby go użyć zacznij Twoją nową prezentację przez
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Nowy z
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
S
|
||
\bar default
|
||
zablonu
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Twój nowy plik prezentacji będzie zawierał jako przykład trójkę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
--
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
--
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Note
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Overlay
|
||
\family default
|
||
dodatkowo zawierają jako przykład użycia tekst niewidzialny (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
InvisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
) i widzialny (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
VisibleText
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
Na koniec zawartość preambuły:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
% Uncomment to print out only slides and overlays
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
%
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
%
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onlyslides{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
slides}
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
% Uncomment to print out only notes
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
%
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
%
|
||
\backslash
|
||
onlynotes{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
notes}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
I ostatnia rzecz: utworzyłem tę klasę LyX-a do obsługi klasy LaTeX2e ,,
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Sli
|
||
\noun default
|
||
TeX emulation'', one of the built-in LaTeX2e classes.
|
||
Neither I nor the rest of the LyX Team endorse or oppose the use of this
|
||
built-in slide class.
|
||
It's here if you want it or need it.
|
||
Istnieją inne klasy LaTeX2e do tworzenia prezentacji, takie jak:
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
[zobacz
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:foiltex"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
] lub pakiet ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
seminar
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' [znajdujący się w wielu dystrybucjach TeX-a].
|
||
Ten ostatni nie jest jeszcze obsługiwany przez LyX-a
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Aktualnie znajduje się plik układu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
seminar.layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
ale nie ma jeszcze pliku szablonu i dokumentacji jak z niego skorzystać
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Try them out to see what sort of alternative they provide.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Foils [aka
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
\noun on
|
||
TeX
|
||
\noun default
|
||
]
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:foiltex"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Allan Rae
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W tej sekcji opisujemy jak użyć LyX-a do przygotowania slajdów do rzutników.
|
||
Istnieją dwie klasy dokumentów, które można do tego celu zastosować: domyślnie
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Slide
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX.
|
||
W tej sekcji opisano tę drugą klasę.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Powiem to jeszcze raz, jasno, aby nie było nieporozumień:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\align center
|
||
|
||
\size large
|
||
Ta sekcja dokumentu opisuje
|
||
\emph on
|
||
tylko
|
||
\emph default
|
||
klasę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,slides (FoilTeX)
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli szukasz dokumentacji do
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,slides (default
|
||
\family default
|
||
)'', zajrzyj do sekcji
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:slitex"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Jeśli w Twoim systemie nie masz zainstalowanej klasy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
[,,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides (FoilTeX)
|
||
\family default
|
||
''], to prawdopodobnie musisz użyć domyślnej klasy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
slides
|
||
\family default
|
||
, która nie jest tak dobra jak
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Klasa
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
jest zaprojektowana do użycia z wersją 2.1 LaTeX-owej klasy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
, która jest teraz integralną częścią LaTeX2e.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Zaczynamy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Oczywiście, aby użyć tej klasy dokumentu, potrzebujesz wybrać klasę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
,,slides (FoilTeX)
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' z listy
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
C
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lass
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jest kilka ustawień w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl Dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
i powinieneś znać ich specyfikę w tej klasie:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Nie zmieniaj opcji
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Strony i Page cols
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Nie są one obsługiwane przez klasę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Domyślną wielkością czcionki jest 20pt, inne to 17pt, 25pt i 30pt.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Domyślną rodziną jest czcionka
|
||
\family sans
|
||
bezszeryfowa
|
||
\family default
|
||
ale równania matematyczne są składane zwykłą czcionką szeryfową.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX obsługuje formaty papieru A4 i Letter, a także specjalny rozmiar do
|
||
pracy z 35mm slajdami.
|
||
Nie obsługuje formatów: A5, B5, legal i executive.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Nie zmieniaj ustawień
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Pozycja wstawki
|
||
\family default
|
||
, ponieważ są one ignorowane.
|
||
Wszystkie wstawki pojawiają się w miejscu gdzie zostały umieszczone w tekście.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Ustawienia
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
agestyle
|
||
\family default
|
||
zachowują się troszkę inaczej w tej klasie.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX dostarcza rozszerzone możliwości nagłówków i stopek włączają w to logo
|
||
użytkownika.
|
||
Zobacz sekcję
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:foilfoot"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
aby poznać więcej szczegółów.
|
||
Strona tytułowa jest traktowana inaczej niż inne strony dokumentu:
|
||
\emph on
|
||
zawsze
|
||
\emph default
|
||
jest nienumerowana i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
zawsze
|
||
\emph default
|
||
logo jest wycentrowane u dołu strony (jeśli je zdefiniowano).
|
||
Możliwe do wyboru style strony:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\series bold
|
||
empty
|
||
\family default
|
||
\series default
|
||
Nie jest dodawany numer ani inne nagłówki i stopki,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\series bold
|
||
plain
|
||
\family default
|
||
\series default
|
||
Na dole w środku slajdu umieszczony zostanie numer slajdu.
|
||
bez innych nagłówków i stopek (innych niż przypisy).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
foilheadings
|
||
\series default
|
||
W prawym dolnym narożniku slajdu umieszczony zostanie numer slajdu.
|
||
Dodatkowe nagłówki i stopki zostaną wyświetlone.
|
||
To jest styl domyślny.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
fancy
|
||
\series default
|
||
Umożliwia skorzystanie z pakietu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
fancyheadings
|
||
\family default
|
||
mimo, że jego użycie z
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX nie jest polecane przez autorów pakietu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX z powodu kilku możliwych rozjechań się układu strony.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Opcje dodatkowe
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Następujące opcje mogą być użyte w polu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Opcje dodatkowe
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl Dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
35mmSlide
|
||
\series default
|
||
Ustawia rozmiar strony 7.33 cale na 11 cali.
|
||
Taki rozmiar ma identyczne proporcje jak 35mm slajd.
|
||
To ustawienie ułatwia pracę z tym medium,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
headrule
|
||
\series default
|
||
Umieszcza poziomą linię poniżej nagłówka na każdej stronie z wyjątkiem
|
||
strony tytułowej,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
footrule
|
||
\series default
|
||
Umieszcza poziomą linię powyżej stopki na każdej stronie z wyjątkiem strony
|
||
tytułowej,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
dvips
|
||
\series default
|
||
Ta opcja jest automatycznie włączona
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
Bez tej opcji możesz korzystać wprost z pdfLaTeX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, gdy tworzysz nowy dokument w tej klasie.
|
||
Opcja ta mówi
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX-owi aby użył jako sterownika programu dvips do obrotu tych stron, które
|
||
ustawiono jako poziome,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
landscape
|
||
\series default
|
||
Po prostu zmienia układ strony na poziomy, ale nie dokonuje obrotu.
|
||
Dla tego jeśli chcesz używać tej opcji potrzebujesz użyć zewnętrznego programu
|
||
do obrotu każdej strony lub włóż papier do drukarki poziomo.
|
||
Uwaga ta opcja zamienia role środowisk
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foilhead
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Rotatefoilhead
|
||
\family default
|
||
(nie przejmuj się jest to opisane w następnej sekcji),
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
leqno
|
||
\series default
|
||
Numeracja równań po lewej stronie równania,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMx
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
fleqn
|
||
\series default
|
||
Wyrównuje równania do lewej.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Obsługiwane środowiska
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Większość zwykłych środowisk występujących w innych klasach jest także obsługiwa
|
||
nych w klasie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jest kilka dodatkowych środowisk dostarczanych przez
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX a także kilka dodanych przez LyX-a.
|
||
Poniżej podano standardowe środowiska występujące również w innych klasach:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{multicols}{2}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Standard
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Itemize
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Enumerate
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Description
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
List
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LyX-Code
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Verse
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Quote
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Quotation
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Abstract
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Bibliography
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Address
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
RightAddress
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Caption
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Comment
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{multicols}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Następne są główne środowiska niezależnie od środowisk strukturyzujących
|
||
tekst.
|
||
Folie są właściwie samodzielnymi sekcjami posiadającymi tytuł i treść.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX dostarcza specyficznych poleceń rozpoczynających nową folię, są to:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foilhead
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Rotatefoilhead
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX dostarcza także lekko zmodyfikowane wersje powyższych środowisk o nazwach:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ShortFoilhead
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ShortRotatefoilhead
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
różnice pomiędzy nimi są wyjaśnione w następnej sekcji.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Folie są często używane do prezentacji pomysłów lub nowych teorii i także
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX dostarcza szeroki wachlarz narzędzi do ich prezentacji:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin{multicols}{2}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Theorem
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Lemma
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Corollary
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Proposition
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Definition
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Proof
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Theorem*
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Lemma*
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Corollary*
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Proposition*
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Definition*
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end{multicols}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wersje z gwiazdką są środowiskami nienumerowanymi, a bez gwiazdki są numerowane.
|
||
Są jeszcze dwa środowiska list dodane przez LyX i są to:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
TickList
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CrossList
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jest jeszcze kilka poleceń
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX-a, które nie są obsługiwane przez LyX.
|
||
Wspomnimy o nich i ich przeznaczeniu w sekcji
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:unsuppfoils"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Tworzenie folii
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W tej sekcji podamy proste wprowadzenie jak korzystać z różnych środowisk
|
||
aby utworzyć folię.
|
||
Jeśli chcesz zobaczyć przykład folii zobacz plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Foils.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
dostępny z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
O
|
||
\bar default
|
||
twórz\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
i naciśnij przycisk
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Examples
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Strona tytułowa
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Nie tak jak inne klasy dostarczające środowisk
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Abstract
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
tworzy tytuł na własnej stronie.
|
||
Jeśli opuścisz środowisko
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
, to LaTeX w zastępstwie wstawi bieżącą datę (aktualizowaną przy każdym
|
||
podglądzie).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Rozpoczęcie nowej folii
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jak wspomniałem wcześniej, mamy cztery sposoby na utworzenie nowej folii.
|
||
Dla folii pionowych powinieneś użyć
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foilhead
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ShortFoilhead.
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Różnica pomiędzy tymi środowiskami polega na wielkości odstępu pomiędzy
|
||
tytułem a treścią.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Folie poziome tworzymy za pomocą środowisk
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Rotatefoilhead
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ShortRotatefoilhead
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Znów różnica miedzy nimi polega na odstępie pomiędzy tytułem a treścią.
|
||
W obu skróconych wersjach mamy o pół cala mniejszy odstęp.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jednym problemem z obsługą poziomych slajdów jest wymóg użycia sterownika
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
dvips
|
||
\family default
|
||
do utworzenia pliku PostScriptŽ, w przeciwnym razie folia nie zostanie
|
||
obrócona.
|
||
Jest możliwość uzyskania poziomych folii nawet jeśli nie masz programu
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
dvips
|
||
\family default
|
||
, po prostu musisz włożyć folie poziomo do drukarki;-)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Theorems, Lemmas, Proofs i więcej
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Z powodu małego błędu w LyX-ie nie można umieścić dwóch środowisk tego samego
|
||
typu bezpośrednio jedno po drugim.
|
||
Musza one być czymkolwiek rozdzielone.
|
||
Jeśli spróbujesz , będziesz mógł rozciągnąć poprzednie środowisko, tak
|
||
abyś miał połączone dwa środowiska razem.
|
||
A jak rozwiązać ten problem? Najprostszym rozwiązaniem jest wstawienie
|
||
tekstu pomiędzy dwa środowiska lub wstawienie wstawki
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
pomiędzy te środowiska zawierającej znak komentarza ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
To wymusi na LyX-ie utworzenie dwóch oddzielnych środowisk i da poprawny
|
||
wynik.
|
||
Przykład jest zawarty w dostarczonym pliku w dystrybucji LyX-a.
|
||
pamiętaj, problem pojawia się tylko jeśli próbujesz umieścić dwa środowiska
|
||
takie jak Theorem bezpośrednio jedno za drugim.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Listy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Możesz korzystać ze wszystkich obsługiwanych i występujących w innych klasach,
|
||
środowisk list, a także z dwóch nowych.
|
||
Tutaj opiszę tylko te nowe.
|
||
Jeśli chcesz znaleźć więcej informacji o innych środowiskach list zajrzyj
|
||
do
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręcznika Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
Jeśli zamierzasz korzystać z wyliczeń powinieneś także przeczytać sekcję
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:bullet"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Wybór znaku wyliczenia
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dwa nowe style list
|
||
\family sans
|
||
TickList
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CrossList
|
||
\family default
|
||
, zaprojektowano aby ułatwić Ci tworzenie list czynności wykonanych i nie
|
||
lub co jest w porządku lub złe, przez dostarczenie dedykowanych środowisk,
|
||
które używają haczyka (akceptacji) lub krzyżyka (negacji) jako znaku wyliczenia.
|
||
Te listy są w rzeczywistości dedykowanymi wariantami środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Itemize
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Wymagają one jednak zainstalowanego pakietu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
psnfss
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Rysunki i Tabele
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX redefiniuje wstawki tabel i rysunków tak, aby pojawiły się dokładnie
|
||
w miejscu ich wystąpienia w tekście.
|
||
W rzeczywistości zmiany pozycji wstawki są ignorowane.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Nagłówki i stopki
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:foilfoot"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
MyLogo{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
Restriction{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
są przeznaczone do sterowania lewą stopką.
|
||
Pierwsze pozwala na dołączenie
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
Aby dołączyć logo graficzne to należy jako argument polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
MyLogo{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
wpisać:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
includegraphics{nazwapliku}
|
||
\family default
|
||
oraz umieścić w preambule polecenie:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{graphicx}
|
||
\family default
|
||
albo
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{graphics}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
logo graficznego do folii, a domyślnie wpisuje ,,--Typeset by FoilTeX--''.
|
||
Drugie polecenie pozwala na wprowadzenie klasyfikacji dostępności, np.
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Poufne
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
Domyślnie jest puste.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pozostałe narożniki można wypełnić poleceniami
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Right
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Footer
|
||
\family default
|
||
(domyślnie numer folii),
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Right
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Header
|
||
\family default
|
||
(prawy górny) i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Left
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Header
|
||
\family default
|
||
(lewy górny).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Nieobsługiwane funkcje
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Foil
|
||
\family default
|
||
TeX-a
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:unsuppfoils"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wszystkie polecenia wyjaśnione poniżej należy wstawiać w środowisku
|
||
\family sans
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub jako
|
||
\family sans
|
||
TeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
wewnątrz innych środowisk.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Długości
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wszystkie długości są ustawiane poleceniem
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\family default
|
||
\emph on
|
||
lengthname
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
\emph default
|
||
}{
|
||
\family default
|
||
\emph on
|
||
newlength
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
\emph default
|
||
}
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
gdzie
|
||
\emph on
|
||
lengthname
|
||
\emph default
|
||
powinno być zastąpione nazwą długości, która chcesz zmienić, a
|
||
\emph on
|
||
newlength
|
||
\emph default
|
||
przez wartość.
|
||
Dla wszystkich długości należy podać jednostkę, np.
|
||
cale (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
in
|
||
\family default
|
||
), milimetry (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
mm
|
||
\family default
|
||
) lub punkty (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
pt
|
||
\family default
|
||
) lub jednostki względne w dokumencie lub długości odnoszące się do wielkości
|
||
czcionek takie jak
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
textwidth
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Można zmieniać odstęp pomiędzy tytułem folii a treścią, przez zmianę długości
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
foilheadskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Na przykład, aby na
|
||
\emph on
|
||
wszystkich
|
||
\emph default
|
||
foliach tytuły były bliżej treści o pół cala, to wpisz do preambuły:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
foilheadskip}{-0.5in}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Odstępy wokół wstawek mogą być ustawiane przez zmianę następujących długości:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
abovefloatskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
odstęp pomiędzy tekstem a górą wstawki,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
abovecaptionskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
odstęp pomiędzy wstawką a podpisem,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
belowcaptionskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
odstęp pomiędzy podpisem a dalszym tekstem,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
captionwidth
|
||
\family default
|
||
Możesz zadać węższy podpis wstawki niż otaczający tekst przez ustawienie
|
||
tej długości.
|
||
Najlepiej odnosić się do długości
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
textwidth
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jest jeszcze kilka długości związanymi ze strona tytułowa, które mogą być
|
||
użyteczne jeśli masz długie tytuły lub kilku autorów:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
abovetitleskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
odstęp pomiędzy nagłówkiem a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
titleauthorskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
odstęp pomiędzy środowiskami
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\family default
|
||
a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
authorauthorskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
odstęp pomiędzy wielokrotnymi wierszami środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
authordateskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
odstęp pomiędzy środowiskami
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
dateabstractskip
|
||
\family default
|
||
odstęp pomiędzy środowiskami
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Date
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Abstract
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ostatnia długość odnosi się do wszystkich środowisk list.
|
||
Jeśli umieścisz
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
zerolistvertdimens
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
wewnątrz
|
||
\emph default
|
||
środowiska listy, wtedy wszystkie odstępy pionowe pomiędzy elementami listy
|
||
zostaną usunięte.
|
||
Uwaga -- to jest polecenie, a nie długość i nie wymaga
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength
|
||
\family default
|
||
tak jak wspomniane powyżej długości.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Nagłówki i stopki
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
LogoOn
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
LogoOff
|
||
\family default
|
||
sterują wyświetlaniem na danym slajdzie logo zdefiniowanym poleceniem
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
MyLogo
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jeśli wpiszesz polecenie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
LogoOff
|
||
\family default
|
||
do preambuły, to wówczas na żadnej folii nie pojawi się logo.
|
||
Jeśli nie chcesz aby pojawiło się logo na jednej z folii, to umieść na
|
||
niej polecenie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
LogoOff
|
||
\family default
|
||
tuż po tytule strony, a następnie umieść polecenie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
LogoOn
|
||
\family default
|
||
po tytule następnej folii.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pozostałe polecenia sterujące:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
rightfooter{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
prawa stopka, domyślnie zawiera numer strony
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
rightheader{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
prawy nagłówek
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring MMMMMMMMM
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
leftheader{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
lewy nagłówek
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli zdecydujesz się użyć styl strony
|
||
\family sans
|
||
fancy
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Styl dokumentu
|
||
\family default
|
||
, prawdopodobnie powinieneś dodać
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
let
|
||
\backslash
|
||
headwidth
|
||
\backslash
|
||
textwidth
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
do preambuły, tak aby nagłówki i stopki były właściwie umieszczone na poziomych
|
||
stronach.
|
||
Jest to spowodowane niezgodnością układów stron dostarczanych przez pakiet
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
fancyheadings
|
||
\family default
|
||
i klasę
|
||
\family sans
|
||
foils
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Latex8 (Dokumenty konferencyjne IEEE )
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Allan Rae
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Since this class is specifically for writing submissions to IEEE sponsored
|
||
conferences I strongly recommend that you get a copy of their Authors Kit.
|
||
The
|
||
\family sans
|
||
latex.sty
|
||
\family default
|
||
package and associated bibliography style file is included in the kit.
|
||
The Authors Kit is usually sent out by email once your initial submission
|
||
has been accepted.
|
||
There is a lot of useful information in the Authors Kit explaining formatting
|
||
restrictions and so on and I will assume you have read this since that
|
||
means I don't have to repeat it all here.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Zaczynamy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
[AR.
|
||
more to come]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Obsługiwane środowiska
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Standard
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Title
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Author
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
E-mail
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Affiliation
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Abstract
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Section
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
SubSection
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Caption
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Różnice pomiędzy ekranem a dokumentem
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
There are slight differences in appearance mainly with the presentation
|
||
of section counters.
|
||
On screen the trailing period of the section counter is missing but it
|
||
will appear in the output so don't let this worry you.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Hollywood (Hollywood spec scripts)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\shape smallcaps
|
||
Garst Reese
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Getting the format of a Hollywood script right is a ,,rite of passage''.
|
||
Został zaprojektowany do czytania ze zwróceniem uwagi na treść oraz aby
|
||
być łatwym i przyjaznym w czytaniu dla aktorów.
|
||
Każda strona scenariusza powinna być jedną minutą filmu.
|
||
Nie pisz tego czego nie możesz zobaczyć lub usłyszeć na ekranie.
|
||
W całym dokumencie powinna być stosowana czcionka Courier 12pkt, bez kursywy.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Specjalne problemy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Tekst mówcy nie powinien być NIGDY łamany w połowie zdania.
|
||
Jeśli tekst mówcy jest kontynuowany na następnej stronie, powtórz
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Nazwę
|
||
\family default
|
||
mówcy przez
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Cont'd
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Specjalne funkcje
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wstaw nazwę mówcy (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Speaker
|
||
\family default
|
||
) jako etykietę, a dalej wykorzystuj ją przez odnośniki wewnętrzne.
|
||
Okno odnośników będzie wyświetlało obsadę.
|
||
Odnośniki możesz używać do wstawiania nazwy mówcy również w tekście narratora.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Rozmiar papieru i marginesy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
USLetter, lewy 1.6in, prawy 0.75in, górny 0.5in, dolny 0.75in
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Środowiska
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dostępne są następujące środowiska.
|
||
Możesz użyć układu hollywood.bind aby uzyskać skróty klawiszowe jak poniżej.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Standard
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Użyj gdzie nic innego nie pasuje.
|
||
Próbuj nie korzystać z niego.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Narrative
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z n
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Used to describe stage setting and the action.
|
||
Pierwsze użycie nazwy aktora napisz kapitalikiem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
FADE
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
IN
|
||
\family default
|
||
:
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
M-z S-I
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Usually followed by something like ,,on Sally waking up''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
INT:
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z i
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Introduces a new INTERIOR camera set-up.
|
||
Always followed by DAY or NIGHT, or something similar to define the lighting
|
||
required.
|
||
Pisz zawsze dużymi literami.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
EXT:
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z e
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Introduces a new EXTERIOR camera set-up.
|
||
Pisz zawsze dużymi literami.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Speaker
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z s
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
The character speaking.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Parenthetical
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z p
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Instrukcje dla mówcy.
|
||
Nawiasy ,,()'' są wstawiane automatycznie i wyświetlane są tylko w LyX-ie,
|
||
ale zawsze będa drukowane.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Dialogue
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z d
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Co mówca (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Speaker
|
||
\family default
|
||
) mówi.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Transition
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z t
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Instrukcja przemieszczania dla kamery, np.
|
||
CUT TO:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
FADE
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
OUT:
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S-I
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S-A
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S-T
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Right
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Address
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z r
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Żargon scenariusza
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
(O.S) --- off screen
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
(V.0) --- voice over
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
b.g.
|
||
--- tło
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
C.U.
|
||
--- close-up
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
PAN --- przesunięcie kamery
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
INSERT --- cut to close-up of
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Broadway
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\shape smallcaps
|
||
Garst Reese
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Klasa Broadway jest przeznaczona dla piszących scenariusze teatralne.
|
||
Ten format jest bardziej dekoracyjny i o wiele mniej ustandaryzowany.
|
||
Ten format powinien być odpowiedni dla workshopów.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Specjalne problemy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Podobnie jak format Hollywood.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Specjalne funkcje
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wstaw nazwę mówcy (
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Speaker
|
||
\family default
|
||
) jako etykietę, a dalej wykorzystuj ją przez odnośniki wewnętrzne.
|
||
Okno odnośników wewnętrznych będzie wyświetlać aktualną obsadę.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Rozmiar papieru i marginesy
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
USLetter, lewy 1.6in, prawy 0.75in, górny 0.5in, dolny 0.75in
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Środowiska
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dostępne są następujące środowiska.
|
||
Możesz użyć układu broadway.bind aby uzyskać skróty klawiszowe jak poniżej.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Standard
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Nie powinieneś go używać, ale jest jeśli inne nie będą Ci odpowiadać.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Narrative
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z n
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Used to describe stage setting and the action.
|
||
Pierwsze użycie nazwy aktora napisz kapitalikiem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ACT
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z a
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Automatycznie numerowane.
|
||
Na ekranie będzie numeracja liczbami arabskimi, a na wydruku rzymskimi.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ACT*
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S at
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Podtytuł ACT.
|
||
\family default
|
||
Tekst jest centrowany.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
SCENE
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S-S
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Nie jest numerowane automatycznie.
|
||
Ty podajesz numer.
|
||
This is because I couldn't figure out how.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
AT
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
RISE:
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S-R
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
A special case of Narrative to describe the setting and action as the curtain
|
||
rises.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Speaker
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z s
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Nazwa mówcy (aktora), wyśrodkowana napisana będzie kapitalikiem.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Parenthetical
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z p
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Instrukcje dla mówcy.
|
||
Nawiasy ,,()'' są wstawiane automatycznie, ale wyświetlane są tylko w LyX-ie,
|
||
ale zawsze będa drukowane.
|
||
To środowisko jest używane tylko wewnątrz środowiska
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Dialogue
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Dialogue
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z d
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Co mówi mówca.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CURTAIN
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S-C
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
Opuszczenie kurtyny.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Title
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S-T
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z S-A
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Right_Address
|
||
\begin_inset space \hfill{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
M-z r
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Hello there.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
RevTeX4
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Amir Karge
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Klasa dokumentu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Revtex
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
4
|
||
\family default
|
||
współpracuje z klasą RevTeX 4.0 (wydanie
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\beta$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
z maja 1999 roku) American Physical Society.
|
||
LyX ma klasę dokumentu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Revtex
|
||
\family default
|
||
, która współpracuje z RevTeX 3.1.
|
||
Jednak wersja 3.1 jest generalnie przestarzała jako współpracująca z LaTeX2.09,
|
||
co oznacza, że współpraca z LyX-em nie jest najlepsza., ponieważ LyX wymaga
|
||
LaTeX2e.
|
||
Since RevTeX 4.0 has been designed to work much more cleanly with LaTeX2e,
|
||
LyX with
|
||
\family sans
|
||
RevTeX
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
4
|
||
\family default
|
||
textclass should also be pretty easy to use.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
These documents are supposed to be used in
|
||
\emph on
|
||
addition
|
||
\emph default
|
||
to the RevTeX 4.0 documents, so we don't describe any of the special RevTeX
|
||
macros, and assume you'll know what to put in the preamble if necessary.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Instalacja
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
All you need to do is install RevTeX 4, as described in the package's README
|
||
file.
|
||
the package can be found atThe RevTeX 4 Web Site
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
http://publish.aps.org/revtex4/
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
Install it somewhere that LaTeX can see it.
|
||
Test it by trying to LaTeX a short RevTeX 4 document in some random directory
|
||
(i.e., not the directory where you installed the class file.) Then, if you
|
||
reconfigure LyX, it will find the class file and let you use the RevTeX4
|
||
textclass.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Probably the easiest way to get started is either to import a RevTeX 4 document
|
||
using
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
tex2lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
, or to use the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Revtex
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
4
|
||
\family default
|
||
template, found in the templates directory.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Preambuła Matter
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Optional arguments to
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
documentclass
|
||
\family default
|
||
, like ,,preprint'' and ,,aps'', go in the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
E
|
||
\bar under
|
||
x
|
||
\bar default
|
||
tra Options
|
||
\family default
|
||
field in the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Document Layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
popup, as usual.
|
||
Remember that in RevTeX, at least one optional argument is required!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Other preamble matter, like
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
draft
|
||
\family default
|
||
etc.
|
||
goes in the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Latex Preamble
|
||
\family default
|
||
popup, also as usual.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Układ
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The layouts basically correspond to the commands in RevTeX4.0.
|
||
For example, the Email layout corresponds to
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
email{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Note that (at least as of RevTeX 4.0 Beta), the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Address
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Affiliation
|
||
\family default
|
||
layouts are exactly equivalent, so you shouldn't need to use both.
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
In case you're curious, both were included so that
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
tex2lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
would be able to translate both
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
address
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
affiliation
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Ważne uwagi
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
There are a couple of important unique aspects of RevTeX 4 which might cause
|
||
bugs that will be even more confusing in LyX.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
In RevTeX, the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
thanks
|
||
\family default
|
||
command goes
|
||
\emph on
|
||
outside
|
||
\emph default
|
||
the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
author
|
||
\family default
|
||
command.
|
||
The LyX equivalent is that there is a separate Thanks layout.
|
||
Do
|
||
\emph on
|
||
not
|
||
\emph default
|
||
write footnotes in the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
layout, or weird things may happen.
|
||
See the RevTeX 4 documentation for more details.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Also, the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Email
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
URL
|
||
\family default
|
||
, and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Thanks
|
||
\family default
|
||
layouts must be placed
|
||
\emph on
|
||
in between
|
||
\emph default
|
||
the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Author
|
||
\family default
|
||
layout and the corresponding
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Address
|
||
\family default
|
||
(or equivalent
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Affiliation
|
||
\family default
|
||
) layout.
|
||
If you put the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Thanks
|
||
\family default
|
||
after the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Address
|
||
\family default
|
||
, the LaTeX won't compile.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Drawbacks
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The main problem with this layout is that you can't use the optional arguments
|
||
to layouts like Email and Title.
|
||
(The problem is not unique to this layout; in LyX 1.0, you can't use optional
|
||
arguments to the Section layouts.) This means that after you export that
|
||
file to LaTeX (which you'll need to do eventually to send it in to APS),
|
||
you'll need to edit the LaTeX file with a text editor to add the optional
|
||
arguments to set, e.g., the running title for the page headers.
|
||
Lacking these layouts makes the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
altaffiliation
|
||
\family default
|
||
(and the equivalent
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
altaddress
|
||
\family default
|
||
) useless, so the corresponding layouts don't exist, and will have to be
|
||
added by hand.
|
||
This drawback will be fixed in LyX 1.2.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
article (mwart), book (mwbk) i report (mwrep)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Tomasz Łuczak
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Klasy dokumentu
|
||
\emph on
|
||
article (mwart)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
,
|
||
\emph on
|
||
report (mwrep)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
i
|
||
\emph on
|
||
book (mwbk)
|
||
\emph default
|
||
autorstwa marcina Wolińskiego odpowiadają klasom LateX-a odpowiednio:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
mwart.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
mwbk.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
mwrep.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Zastępują one standardowe klasy:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
article.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
book.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
report.cls
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Są one zgodne z polskimi zwyczajami typograficznymi.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Podstawowe różnice:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Nienumerowane tytularia ( z gwiazdką) są dopisywane do spisu treści.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Dodatkowe style strony:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
uheadings pagina górna z linią oddzielającą,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
myheadings pagina górna z zadawaną treścią poleceniami:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
markright
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
markboth
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
myuheadings pagina górna z zadawaną treścią z linią oddzielającą,
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
outer paginacja w stopce od strony zewnętrznego marginesu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Opcje
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
rmheadings szeryfowe tytularia -- opcja domyślna
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
sfheadings bezszeryfowe tytularia
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
authortitle najpierw autor poniżej tytuł -- opcja domyślna
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
titleauthor najpierw tytuł poniżej autor
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
withmarginpar rezerwuje miejsce na marginalia
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Chapter
|
||
Import i eksport innych formatów plików
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zagadnienie importu i eksportu z/do innych formatów plików zostało wspomniane
|
||
w
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Podręczniku Użytkownika
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.
|
||
W tym rozdziale jest opisane więcej szczegółów potrzebnych do zrozumienia
|
||
tego co się dzieje po naciśnięciu polecenia
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
I
|
||
\bar default
|
||
mportuj
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
E
|
||
\bar under
|
||
x
|
||
\bar default
|
||
portuj
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Import z innych formatów
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Translating from LaTeX into LyX is performed by a converter program called
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
tex2lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
|
||
\lang polish
|
||
Ponadto jest to samodzielny program, który może być wywoływany z wiersza
|
||
poleceń.
|
||
LyX wywołuje go automatycznie podczas importu pliku LaTeX-a.
|
||
Zobacz sekcję
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:Importowanie-plików-LaTeX-a"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
dla pełniejszego opisu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
ASCII
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Są dwie metody importu plików tekstowych ASCII.
|
||
Import ,,jako wiersze'' zachowuje wszystkie końce wierszy z pliku ASCII
|
||
do LyX-a, wówczas każdy wiersz jest oddzielnym akapitem.
|
||
Podczas importu ,,jako akapit'' kolejne wiersze łączone są w jeden akapit.
|
||
Pusty wiersz traktowany jest jako separator akapitów.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Noweb
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
[Editor's note: Needs to be written, obviously - any volunteers? --- mer]
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Eksport do innych formatów
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX tworzy dwa typy plików LaTeX-owych: pliki do normalnego przetwarzania
|
||
(do podglądu DVI itp.), które nie są nigdy oglądane oraz pliki o formie
|
||
czytelnej dla ludzi.
|
||
Jedyną możliwą do ustawienia jest dyrektywa
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ascii_linelen
|
||
\family default
|
||
określająca maksymalną długość wiersza pliku, domyślną wartością jest 75
|
||
znaków.
|
||
Plik wynikowy jest poprawnym plikiem LaTeX-a, lecz preambuła może wyglądać
|
||
trochę przerażająco ponieważ zawiera kilka definicji używanych przez LyX-a,
|
||
które nie wyglądają na utworzone przez człowieka.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
DVI
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Plik DVI (skrót od
|
||
\family sans
|
||
D
|
||
\family default
|
||
e
|
||
\family sans
|
||
V
|
||
\family default
|
||
ice
|
||
\family sans
|
||
I
|
||
\family default
|
||
ndependent -- ,,sprzętowo niezależne'') są tworzone podczas przetwarzania
|
||
Twojego dokumentu przez LaTeX.
|
||
Nie ma żadnych opcji do ustawienia przez użytkownika.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
PostScript
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Następny krokiem w łańcuchu konwersji jest konwersja pliku DVI do PostScript.
|
||
Najczęściej używanym do tego celu programem jest program
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
dvips
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Wybrany program należy podać w pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyxrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
w dyrektywie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
print_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Argumenty wiersza poleceń, np.
|
||
dla dvips polecenia druku w odwrotnej kolejności (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-r
|
||
\family default
|
||
) można podać w dyrektywie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
print_extra_options
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
ASCII
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Eksport do ASCII próbuje zachować ,,kształt'' dokumentu jak to możliwe,
|
||
ale takie elementy jak centrowanie i wcięcia są odrzucane, a akapity są
|
||
rozdzielane pustym wierszem.
|
||
Numeracja sekcji i odnośników jest wykonana poprawnie, tak że w efekcie
|
||
plik jest dość przejrzysty.
|
||
Jedyną możliwą do ustawienia jest dyrektywa
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ascii_linelen
|
||
\family default
|
||
określająca maksymalną długość wiersza pliku ASCII.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
HTML
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Dokumenty LyX-a mogą być konwertowane do formatu hipertekstowego, zwykle
|
||
najpierw dokonywana jest konwersja do LaTeX-a, który konwertuje do formatu
|
||
HTML.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Aktualnie są dostępne dla LyX-a trzy konwertery LaTeX
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\rightarrow$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
HTML:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
tth
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
latex2html
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
hevea
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Są one wykrywane automatycznie, jednak można wymusić wybór jednego z nich
|
||
dyrektywą w pliku konfiguracyjnym
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
html_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
W tej dyrektywie można także dołączyć argumenty wiersza poleceń.
|
||
Czytaj komentarze w pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyxrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
, które zawierają najbardziej aktualne informacje dotyczące szczegółów użycia
|
||
poszczególnych dyrektyw.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
PDF
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Dekel Tsur
|
||
\noun default
|
||
(mostly)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Najszybszą drogą do tworzenia plików PDF (bez znaczników, linków itp.) w
|
||
dowolnej wersji LyX-a jest zapisanie dokumentu w formacie PostScript, a
|
||
następnie uruchomienie polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ps2pdf
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Począwszy od wersji 1.1.6 dostępna jest pozycja menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Exportuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
PDF
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Od wersji 1.1.6 jest to najlepsza droga do uzyskania porządnych plików PDF.
|
||
Jest trochę kłopotów z czcionkami, na które powinieneś uważać -- zobacz
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:badfonts"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Użycie pdfLaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Korzystając z pdfLaTeX potrzebujesz skonwertować swoje obrazki EPS do formatu
|
||
PDF (zobacz
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:pdfeps"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
) i nie możesz używać pstricks.
|
||
Z drugiej strony, korzystając z pdfLaTeX można wstawiać wprost rysunki
|
||
w formatach JPEG lub PNG, używać czcionek TrueType i wiele innych.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Dlaczego tekst wygląda mało czytelnie przy podglądzie za pomocą Acrobat
|
||
Reader?
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:badfonts"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Źródłem kłopotów są czcionki bitmapowe brzydko wyświetlane przez Acrobat
|
||
Reader.
|
||
Podczas tworzenia pliku PDF z pliku LyX-a potrzebujesz czcionek obwiedniowych
|
||
zamiast bitmapowych (w rzeczywistości powinieneś także używać czcionek
|
||
obwiedniowych w plikach postscriptowych).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Ostatnie dystrybucje LaTeX-a posiadają standardowe czcionki CM (Computer
|
||
Modern) PostScript Type 1.
|
||
PdfLaTeX używa tych czcionek domyślnie.
|
||
Dvips nie używa ich domyślnie, dla ich użycia należy dopisać do pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
~/.dvipsrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
następujące wiersze
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
p+ psfonts.cmz
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
p+ psfonts.amz
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli używane jest domyślne kodowanie LaTeX-a (OT1), to nie trzeba robić
|
||
nic więcej.
|
||
Ale jeśli używane jest kodowanie T1 to LaTeX używa nowych czcionek EC,
|
||
dla których nie ma wersji Type1.
|
||
Rozwiązaniem jest użycie pakietu ae, który emuluje kodowanie T1 używając
|
||
czcionek CM.
|
||
Należy wówczas w preambule dopisać
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage{ae,aecompl}
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Jednak niektórych znaków brakuje w czcionkach CM (np.
|
||
eth, thorn) i są one pobierane z czcionek EC.
|
||
Dlatego pobierane są znaki jako bitmapy.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Uwaga: LyX używa domyślnie kodowania T1.
|
||
Jeśli chcesz stosować domyślne kodowanie (co nie jest zalecane chyba że
|
||
piszesz tylko w języku angielskim), dodaj wiersz
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
font_encoding default
|
||
\family default
|
||
do pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
~/.lyx/lyxrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
Dla składu w języku polskim zaleca się stosować kodowanie OT4 oraz pakiet
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
polski
|
||
\family default
|
||
zamiast pakietu
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
babel
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Pakiet
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
polski
|
||
\family default
|
||
włącza spolonizowane czcionki CM w układzie OT4 zwane czcionkami PL.
|
||
Czcionki PL występują również w wersji obwiedniowej co rozwiązuje problemy
|
||
z Acrobat Readerem.
|
||
Przyp.
|
||
tłum.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Alternatywą jest użycie standardowych czcionek postscriptowych zamiast
|
||
czcionek CM.
|
||
Do tego potrzebujesz wybrać pslatex jako globalną czcionkę w oknie układu
|
||
dokumentu.
|
||
Gdy używamy czcionek postsciptowych to pliki PDF są mniejsze o czcionki
|
||
nie dołączone do pliku.
|
||
Ponadto czcionki postscriptowe dołączają wszystkie krzywe T1.
|
||
Z drugiej zaś strony czcionki postscriptowe nie posiadają półgrubych czcionek
|
||
symboli i muszą być użyte pmb (poor man's bold, zobacz
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:pdfbold"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
).
|
||
Czcionki postscriptowe także wyglądają inaczej z zestawu czcionek CM.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Podsumowując czcionki postscriptowe i Computer Modern dają dobre rezultaty
|
||
(z kilkoma wyjątkami).
|
||
Decyzja których używać jest kwestią gustu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Jak mogę użyć pdfLaTeX z obrazkami w formacie EPS?
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:pdfeps"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
PdfLaTeX nie obsługuje włączania plików EPS, ale obsługuje włączanie plików
|
||
PDF.
|
||
Jeśli masz dokumenty z włączonymi rysunkami EPS, np.
|
||
plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
foo.eps
|
||
\family default
|
||
, to powinieneś:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Skonwertuj
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
foo.eps
|
||
\family default
|
||
do PDF za pomocą
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
epstopdf foo.eps
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Kiedy wstawiasz rysunek w dokumencie nie podawaj rozszerzenia nazwy pliku:
|
||
na przykład, wstawiając plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
foo.eps
|
||
\family default
|
||
wystarczy wpisać tylko
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
foo
|
||
\family default
|
||
w oknie dialogowym.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Uwaga: W LyX 1.2.0 będzie możliwe wstawianie różnych rodzajów rysunków ze
|
||
wszystkimi niezbędnymi transformacjami.
|
||
Częściowo funkcjonalne wstawianie istnieje w wersji 1.1.6, do użycia należy
|
||
wpisać
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
M-x graphics-insert
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Dlaczego polecenie
|
||
\backslash
|
||
boldsymbol{} nie działa gdy używam pslatex?
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:pdfbold"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Czcionki PostScript nie posiadają symboli półgrubych.
|
||
Rozwiązaniem jest użycie polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pmb{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
(poor man's bold).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jest to możliwe przez przedefiniowanie polecenia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
boldsymbol
|
||
\family default
|
||
do użycia
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pmb
|
||
\family default
|
||
przez:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
renewcommand{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
boldsymbol}[1]{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pmb{#1}}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
w preambule.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Czy jest możliwe zapisanie kodu przetwarzanego tylko przez pdfLaTeX-a?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Tak.
|
||
Oto przykład:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
newif
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ifpdf
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ifx
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pdfoutput
|
||
\backslash
|
||
undefined
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pdffalse
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
else
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pdftrue
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fi
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
ifpdf
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pdfinfo { /Author (your name and e-mail address)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
/Title (official title -- i.e., title element)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
/Subject (one line description of the document)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
pdfcatalog { /PageMode (/UseNone)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
% /OpenAction (fitbh)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage[pdftex]{hyperref}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
else
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
usepackage[ps2pdf]{hyperref}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fi
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Eksport użytkownika
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Eksport użytkownika jest możliwy jeśli masz dziwny format do którego chcesz
|
||
konwertować, zakładając, że masz odpowiedni konwerter.
|
||
Format pliku wejściowego jest podany w dyrektywie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
custom_export_format
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
LyX będzie automatycznie konwertował plik do tego miejsca, a wtedy zostanie
|
||
on przekazany do Twojego konwertera.
|
||
Możliwymi wartościami są:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
dvi
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ps
|
||
\family default
|
||
i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ascii
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenie wywołania konwertera jest podane w dyrektywie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
custom_export_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
To powinno być kompletne polecenie wiersza poleceń, które wykorzystuje
|
||
zmienną środowiska
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$$FNAME
|
||
\family default
|
||
do przekazania nazwy pliku głównego.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Może będziesz musiał trochę poprawić podaną sekwencję, dla zgodności z twoją
|
||
powłoką.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Omawiany sposób eksportu ustawia się w domyślnym lokalnym pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyxrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Gdy wybierzesz polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
E
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ksportuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
C
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ustom
|
||
\family default
|
||
, pojawi się okno, w którym można zmienić dowolną wartość.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Chapter
|
||
Funkcje LyX-a wymagające zewnętrznych programów
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Faksowanie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Jürgen Vigna
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wysyłanie faksów wprost z LyX-a
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Przede wszystkim musimy wspomnieć, że LyX potrafi wysyłać faksy pod warunkiem,
|
||
że masz zainstalowane i działające oprogramowanie do wysyłania faksów (np.
|
||
HylaFax, efax, mgetty+sendfax, \SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
).
|
||
LyX pracuje tylko jako graficzny interfejs (front end) do tych programów!
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W zależności od używanego oprogramowania faksowego musisz ustawić kilka
|
||
poleceń w pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyxrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Oto te polecenia:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fax_command:
|
||
\family default
|
||
Tutaj należy podać polecenie, które ma wywołać LyX aby wysłać faks.
|
||
Polecenie powinno być zdolne przetworzyć plik PostScript, wytworzony przez
|
||
LyX-a.
|
||
Łańcuch polecenia może zawierać następujące zmienne:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$$Host:
|
||
\family default
|
||
zastępuje nazwę zmiennej środowiska FAX_SERVER
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$$Comment:
|
||
\family default
|
||
zastępuje zawartość pola komentarz
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$$Enterprise:
|
||
\family default
|
||
zastępuje zawartość pola Firma
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$$Name:
|
||
\family default
|
||
zastępuje zawartość pola nazwa
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$$Phone:
|
||
\family default
|
||
zastępuje zawartość pola numer faksu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$$FName:
|
||
\family default
|
||
zastępuje nazwę pliku, który ma zostać wysłany
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Paragraph
|
||
Przykłady:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Przyjmujemy, że nazwałeś plik ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
newfile.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' i chciałbyś wysłać go wprost do faksu nie opuszczając LyX-a.
|
||
Masz zainstalowane oprogramowanie HylaFax i twoja zmienna środowiska
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
FAX_SERVER
|
||
\family default
|
||
ma wartość ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
faxhost.mydomain
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' i podałeś te wartości w oknie faksowania:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Fax.
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
no:
|
||
\family default
|
||
+39-2-444666
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Dest.
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Name:
|
||
\family default
|
||
Someone
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Enterprise:
|
||
\family default
|
||
Startrek
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Labeling
|
||
\labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Comment:
|
||
\family default
|
||
This comment string
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Z podanymi niżej ustawieniami:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fax_command
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
sendfax -n -h '$$Host' -c '$$Comment'
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
-x '$$Enterprise' -d '$$Name'@'$$Phone' '$$FName'
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
zostanie wykonane polecenie:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
sendfax -n -h faxhost.mydomain -c 'This comment string'
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
-x 'Startrek' -d 'Someone'@'+39-2-444666'
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
<tempfile-path>/newfile.ps
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
phone_book:
|
||
\family default
|
||
Zawiera nazwę pliku książki telefonicznej, którą możesz utworzyć w oknie
|
||
formularza faksu.
|
||
Domyślną wartością jest
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$HOME/.lyx/phonebook.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Paragraph
|
||
Przykłady:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
phone_book myphonebook
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
zapisuje i czyta plik książki telefonicznej z pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$HOME/.lyx/myphonebook
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
phone_book /var/lib/phonebook
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
zapisuje i czyta plik książki telefonicznej
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
/var/lib/phonebook
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fax_program:
|
||
\family default
|
||
W tym miejscu podajesz program, który LyX wywoła jako zewnętrzny program
|
||
do wysłania Twojego faksu (np.
|
||
tkhylafax), zamiast wbudowanego formularza faksu.
|
||
Dopuszczalna jest tylko zmienna
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
$$FName
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Paragraph
|
||
Przykłady:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
fax_program
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
tkhylafax '$$Fname'
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Przy powyższych założeniach zostanie wykonane następujące polecenie:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
tkhylafax <tempfile-path>/newfile.ps
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Check TeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by Asger
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Alstrup
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Edycja
|
||
\family default
|
||
możesz znaleźć polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
C
|
||
\bar under
|
||
h
|
||
\bar default
|
||
eck
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
TeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Ta funkcja LyX-a wymaga posiadania zainstalowanego zewnętrznego programu
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
chktex
|
||
\family default
|
||
i jest wygaszone jeśli go nie posiadasz.
|
||
Możesz go pobrać z archiwów CTAN lub z
|
||
\begin_inset Flex URL
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
http://www.ifi.uio.no/~jensthi/chktex/
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Pakiet
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
jest programem napisanym przez sfrustrowanego
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Jens T.
|
||
Berger Thielemann
|
||
\noun default
|
||
, ponieważ wiele konstrukcji LaTeX-a czasami jest nieintuicyjnych i łatwych
|
||
do zapomnienia.
|
||
Program przetwarzając Twój plik LaTeX-a sprawdza integralność pliku i zaznacza
|
||
błędy.
|
||
W języku technicznym jest to
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Lint
|
||
\family default
|
||
dla LaTeX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Czy CheckTeX jest kontrolerem składni, którego użycie zapewni poprawne pliki
|
||
LateX-a? Odpowiedź jest prosta: Tak jak
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Lint
|
||
\family default
|
||
nie tylko sprawdza składnię programów w języku C, semantykę, wyłapuje wiele
|
||
typowych błędów typograficznych.
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
potrafi wykryć wiele podstawowych błędów, takich jak:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Ellipsis detection:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Use \SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
instead of ...
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
No space in front of/after parenthesis:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
( wrong spacing )
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Enforcement of normal space after common abbreviations:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
e.
|
||
g.
|
||
is too wide spacing.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Enforcement of end-of-sentence space when the last sentence ends with a
|
||
capital letter:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
This is a TEST.
|
||
And this is wrong spacing.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Space in front of labels and similar commands:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
The label should stick right up to the text to avoid falling to a wrong
|
||
page.
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset label
|
||
LatexCommand label
|
||
name "sec:chktex"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
This footnote is in danger of falling off to a wrong page
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Space in front of references, instead of hard spaces:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
In you are in bad luck, the text will break right between the referenced
|
||
text and reference number, and that's a pity.
|
||
See section
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset ref
|
||
LatexCommand ref
|
||
reference "sec:chktex"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Use of ,,x'' instead of
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $\times$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
between numbers:
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
2x2 looks cheap compared to
|
||
\begin_inset Formula $2\times2$
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
i inne \SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
To jest nieocenione narzędzie gdy ,,zakończyliśmy'' pracę nad dokumentem.
|
||
Przed wydrukowaniem powinniśmy sprawdzić obligatoryjnie pisownię i uruchomić
|
||
CheckTeX-a.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Jak użyć
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli masz zainstalowany program
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
checktex
|
||
\family default
|
||
, po prostu wybierz z menu polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
E
|
||
\bar default
|
||
dycja\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
C
|
||
\bar under
|
||
h
|
||
\bar default
|
||
eck TeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
To spowoduje utworzenie pliku LaTeX-a na podstawie Twojego dokumentu, sprawdzen
|
||
ie go przez
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CheckTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
i wstawienie ,,okienek błędów'' do dokumentu z ostrzeżeniami
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CheckTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
, jeśli jakieś znalazł.
|
||
Ostrzeżenia zostaną umieszczone blisko miejsca wystąpienia błędu, które
|
||
możesz szybko odnaleźć za pomocą polecenia z menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
N
|
||
\bar default
|
||
awigacja\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Błąd
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub za pomocą skótu klawiszowego
|
||
\family sans
|
||
C-g
|
||
\family default
|
||
w domyślnym pliku bind
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
cua
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Okienko błędu otwiera się przez kliknięcie na nim myszką lub domyślnym
|
||
skrótem
|
||
\family sans
|
||
C-i
|
||
\family default
|
||
albo skrótem z pliku bind
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
emacs
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
C-o
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Przeczytaj uwagi i popraw błędy jeśli są.
|
||
Jeśli masz kłopoty ze zrozumieniem co oznaczają ostrzeżenia, możesz spokojnie
|
||
je zignorować.
|
||
Remember that there is a hidden layer between the document on screen and
|
||
the technical details in invoking
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CheckTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
, and this gap can make some warnings seem arcane or just right down plain
|
||
silly.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
This document is an excellent testing bed for the feature, and it should
|
||
provide quite a few warnings for you to fiddle with.
|
||
Since computers are only so smart, expect most of the warnings to be false
|
||
alarms, though.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Jak dopasować
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Sometimes, you'll find that
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
makes more noise than suits your mood.
|
||
Then you can choose not to use it, wait until your mood changes, or try
|
||
to customize
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
to get better along with you.
|
||
Another choice in the most desperate situations is to use
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
E
|
||
\bar default
|
||
dycja\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
U
|
||
\bar default
|
||
suń wszystkie okienka błędów
|
||
\family default
|
||
, which will get rid of all warnings instantly.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Mimo to
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
jest
|
||
\emph default
|
||
bardzo konfigurowalny i extensible, nie powinieneś spodziewać się rozwiązania
|
||
wszystkich problemów przez
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
w LyX-ie tą drogą.
|
||
Since LyX has to generate a somewhat special LaTeX file to be able to match
|
||
the line numbers from
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
output
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
You can inspect the specific output from
|
||
\family sans
|
||
chktex
|
||
\family default
|
||
by using
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
View
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
LaTeX
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Log
|
||
\family default
|
||
right after a
|
||
\family sans
|
||
chktex
|
||
\family default
|
||
run.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
to appear correctly.
|
||
Są dwie rzeczy, które możesz wykonać :
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Dopasuj polecenia wywołania
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
w swoim pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyxrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
lub w globalnym pliku konfiguracyjnym instalacji
|
||
\family sans
|
||
ChkTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
(zwykle jest to plik
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
/usr/local/share/chktexrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
Zobacz poniżej jak można włączać i wyłączać ostrzeżenia w wierszu poleceń.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Wyeksportuj swoj dokument do LaTeX-a za pomocą polecenia
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
E
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ksportuj\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
L
|
||
\bar default
|
||
aTeX
|
||
\family default
|
||
i uruchom
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
chktex
|
||
\family default
|
||
ręcznie.
|
||
Invoked in this way, it can be a hassle to find the corresponding place
|
||
in the document inside LyX, but with a little patience, you should be able
|
||
to do it.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Poniższe komunikaty ostrzeżeń mogą być aktywowane lub wyłączone za pomocą
|
||
odpowiednich wpisów w dyrektywie
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
chktex_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
w Twoim pliku
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyxrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Użyj
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-n#
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby wyłączyć ostrzeżenie i
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
-w#
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby je uaktywnić.
|
||
Ostrzeżenia napisane kursywą są domyślnie wyłączone, przez domyślny wpis
|
||
w dyrektywie "
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
chktex -n1 -n3 -n6 -n9 -n22 -n25 -n30 -n38
|
||
\family default
|
||
".
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Notice that you should only use the options that enable and disable warnings,
|
||
because LyX relies on some of the other command line parameters to be set
|
||
in a specific way to have a chance to communicate with
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
chktex
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Command terminated with space.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Non-breaking space (,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
~
|
||
\family default
|
||
'') should have been used.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\emph on
|
||
You should enclose the previous parenthesis with ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Italic correction (,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
/
|
||
\family default
|
||
'') found in non-italic buffer.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Italic correction (,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
/
|
||
\family default
|
||
'') found more than once.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\emph on
|
||
No italic correction (,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
/
|
||
\family default
|
||
'') found.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Accent command ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
cmd
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' needs use of ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
cmd
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Wrong length of dash may have been used.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\emph on
|
||
,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%s
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' expected, found ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%s
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Solo ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%s
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' found.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You should use ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%s
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' to achieve an ellipsis.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Inter-word spacing (,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
'') should perhaps be used.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Inter-sentence spacing (,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
@
|
||
\family default
|
||
'') should perhaps be used.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Could not find argument for command.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
No match found for ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%s
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Math mode still on at end of LaTeX file.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Number of ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
char
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' doesn't match the number of ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
char
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You should use either
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
,,
|
||
\family default
|
||
or
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
''
|
||
\family default
|
||
as an alternative to ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
"
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You should use ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
'
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' (ASCII 39) instead of ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
´
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' (ASCII 180).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
User-specified pattern found.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
This command might not be intended.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Comment displayed.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Either
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
''
|
||
\backslash
|
||
,'
|
||
\family default
|
||
or
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
'
|
||
\backslash
|
||
,''
|
||
\family default
|
||
will look better.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Delete this space to maintain correct page references.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\emph on
|
||
You might wish to put this between a pair of ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
{}
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You ought to remove spaces in front of punctuation.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Could not execute LaTeX command.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Don't use
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
/
|
||
\family default
|
||
in front of small punctuation.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
\size small
|
||
$
|
||
\backslash
|
||
times$
|
||
\family default
|
||
may look prettier here.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\emph on
|
||
Multiple spaces detected in output.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
This text may be ignored.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Use
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
,,
|
||
\family default
|
||
to begin quotation, not '.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Use
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
'
|
||
\family default
|
||
to end quotation, not
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
''
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Don't mix quotes.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You should perhaps use ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
cmd
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' instead.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You should put a space in front of/after parenthesis.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You should avoid spaces in front of/after parenthesis.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\emph on
|
||
You should not use punctuation in front of/after quotes.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
Double space found.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You should put punctuation outside inner/inside display math mode.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You ought to not use primitive TeX in LaTeX code.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
You should remove spaces in front of ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%s
|
||
\family default
|
||
''
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%s
|
||
\family default
|
||
'' is normally not followed by ,,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
%c
|
||
\family default
|
||
''.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Mam nadzieję, że w następnych wersjach LyX-a dostarczymy bardziej kompletny
|
||
interfejs dla tego narzędzia (i jego mniejszego kuzyna
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lacheck
|
||
\family default
|
||
) dla wykorzystania jego pełnych możliwości.
|
||
But it's not exactly useless as it is now: go try it on one of your existing
|
||
documents of a certain length and be surprised.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Kontrola wersji (RCS) w LyX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
by
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Lars Gullik Bjřnnes
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Moi przyjaciele chcieli użyć LyX-a do projektu grupowego.
|
||
Gdy nie znaleźli obsługi kontroli wersji ani blokowania plików, porzucili
|
||
ten pomysł.
|
||
To na tyle mnie zirytowało, że postanowiłem zrobić obsługę dla RCS (z możliwośc
|
||
ią obsługi CVS i/lub SCCS jako przyszłościowe ulepszenie).
|
||
To już zostało zrobione i teraz LyX obsługuje najbardziej podstawowe polecenia
|
||
RCS.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli potrzebujesz zrobić coś bardziej wyszukanego to będziesz musiał zrobić
|
||
to ręcznie w terminalu xterm.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Zanim zaczniesz używać kontroli wersji w LyX-ie powinieneś wpierw przeczytać
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
rcsintro
|
||
\emph default
|
||
(plik man:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
man rcsintro
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
W tym pliku są opisane wszystkie podstawowe funkcje RCS.
|
||
Powinieneś zwrócić szczególną uwagę na katalog RCS oraz na plik główny
|
||
RCS (zakończony v)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W LyX-ie dokonano implementacji dla ostatniej wersji pakietu GNU RCS --
|
||
nie gwarantujemy wykonania dla starszych wersji.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Polecenia RCS w LyX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
W dalszych sekcjach opisano polecenia RCS obsługiwane przez LyX-a.
|
||
Możesz je znaleźć w menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
\bar under
|
||
P
|
||
\bar default
|
||
lik\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
|
||
\bar under
|
||
K
|
||
\bar default
|
||
ontrola wersji
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Rejestruj
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Jeśli dokument nie jest objęty kontrolą wersji, to wyświetlone jest tylko
|
||
to polecenie menu.
|
||
A jeśli dokument jest objęty kontrolą wersji, to te polecenie jest wyłączone.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
To polecenie rejestruje dokument w RCS.
|
||
Zostaniesz zapytany o początkowy opis dokumentu.
|
||
Dokument jest teraz w trybie TylkoDoOdczytu i aby dokonać jego edycji musisz
|
||
wybrać polecenie
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Odblokuj i edytuj
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Dokument objęty kontrolą wersji ma oznaczenie w buforze: [RCS:<version>
|
||
<locker>].
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenie RCS:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ci -q -u -i -t-"<initial description>" <file-name>
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Przeczytaj
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
man ci
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby poznać parametry wywołania polecenia.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Zwolnij
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Gdy skończyłeś edycję pliku wprowadź zmianę do RCS.
|
||
Gdy to zrobisz, zostaniesz zapytany o opis zmian, który zostanie zapisany
|
||
w historii dokumentu.
|
||
Numer wersji zostanie zwiększony, a twoje zmiany dopisane do głównego pliku
|
||
RCS.
|
||
Dokument jest odblokowany i ustawiony w tryb TylkoDoOdczytu.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenie RCS:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
ci -q -u -m"<description>" <file-name>
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Zablokuj i edytuj
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Za pomocą tego polecenia blokujemy dokument dla siebie i możemy go edytować.
|
||
Polecenie ustawia plik w tryb ZapisOdczyt tylko dla Ciebie.
|
||
Możesz kontynuować edycję do czasu, aż do wydania polecenia
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Zwolnij
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
W wierszu statusowym zaznaczone jest że plik został zablokowany.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenie RCS:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
co -q -l <file-name>
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Wróć do ostatniej wersji
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenie usuwa wszystkie wprowadzone zmiany do dokumentu od czasu ostatniej
|
||
rewizji (zwolnienia).
|
||
Zostaniesz przedtem ostrzeżony.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
RCS command:is
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
co -f -u<version> <file-name>
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Usuń ostatnio wprowadzone zmiany
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Wynikiem polecenia jest jak gdyby ostatnia rewizja się nie zdarzyła.
|
||
W dokumencie LyX-a nie są dokonywane żadne zmiany, ale ostatnia wersja
|
||
jest usuwana z głównego pliku RCS.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
RCS command:
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
rcs -o<version> <file-name>
|
||
\family default
|
||
umum
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Pokaż historię zmian
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Polecenie wyświetla pełną historię dokumentu.
|
||
Wyświetlony zostaje
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
rlog <file-name>
|
||
\family default
|
||
w przeglądarce.
|
||
Przeczytaj man
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
rlog
|
||
\family default
|
||
aby poznać więcej informacji.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
Literate Programming
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
By
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Edmar Wienskoski Jr.
|
||
|
||
\noun default
|
||
(edmar-w-jr@technologist.com)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Wprowadzenie
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The main purpose of this documentation is to show you how to use LyX for
|
||
literate programming.
|
||
Where it is assumed that you are familiar with this programming technique,
|
||
and know what
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
tangling
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
and
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
weaving
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
means.
|
||
If that is not the case, please follow the web links provided in the following
|
||
sections.
|
||
There is a lot of good documentation out there covering old development
|
||
history to the latest tools tips.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
It is also assumed that you are familiar with LyX itself to a point that
|
||
you are comfortable changing your
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
lyxrc
|
||
\family default
|
||
file, and X resources file.
|
||
If that is not the case please refer to other LyX documentation to cover
|
||
your specific needs.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
Literate Programming
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
From the Literate Programming FAQ :
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quotation
|
||
Literate programming is the combination of documentation and source together
|
||
in a fashion suited for reading by human beings.
|
||
In fact, literate programs should be enjoyable reading, even inviting!
|
||
(Sorry Bob, I couldn't resist!) In general, literate programs combine source
|
||
and documentation in a single file.
|
||
Literate programming tools then parse the file to produce either readable
|
||
documentation or compilable source.
|
||
The WEB style of literate programming was created by D.E.
|
||
Knuth during the development of his TeX typesetting software.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Another excerpt says:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quotation
|
||
|
||
\emph on
|
||
How is literate programming different from verbose commenting?
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quotation
|
||
There are three distinguishing characteristics.
|
||
In order of importance, they are:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
flexible order of elaboration
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
automatic support for browsing
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
typeset documentation, especially diagrams and mathematics
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Now that I sparked your curiosity, take a look in the references.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
References
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The complete Literate Programming FAQ can be found at:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
http://shelob.ce.ttu.edu/daves/faq.html
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The FAQ lists 23 (twenty three !) different literate programming tools.
|
||
Where some are specialized or
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
tailored
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
for particular programming languages, while other have general scope.
|
||
I selected
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Noweb
|
||
\noun default
|
||
for my own use for several reasons:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
It can generate the documentation either in latex or html.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
It has a open architecture, i.e., it is easy to plug in new filters and to
|
||
perform special processing that you may need.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
There is a good selection of filters available already (the html is one
|
||
of them).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
It is free.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The Noweb web page can be found at:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
https://www.cs.tufts.edu/~nr/noweb/
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Starting from there you can reach many other interesting links and even
|
||
some literate program examples.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
LyX and Literate Programming
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Some changes to LyX were required to enable it to interact with Noweb.
|
||
Those changes were rather simple, and were done in a
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Noweb independent
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
way, i.e., I expect that you will be able to use this new LyX feature with
|
||
some other literate programming tool of your choice by just re-configuring
|
||
your lyxrc file.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Generowanie dokumentów i kodu (weaving and tangling)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Paragraph
|
||
Wybor klasy dokumentu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
If you have installed Noweb and LyX successfully, whenever you open a new
|
||
document or try to change the document class of an existing one, you will
|
||
find that there are three new document classes available:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Article (Noweb)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Book (Noweb)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
Report (Noweb)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
You must select one of them to create your literate documents from.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Note that literate documents are not limited to these three classes.
|
||
New classes can be generated from other styles like letter or in combination
|
||
with other class variations like Article (AMS).
|
||
I have limited the choice to these three because I didn't want to clog
|
||
the list of options with all possible variations.
|
||
If you have special needs that cannot be covered by one of the existing
|
||
classes, let me know and I will arrange to insert a new entry, or teach
|
||
you how to do it.
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
It is very simple, it involves the creation of a file with four lines, and
|
||
re-running of the auto configuration.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
a new set of document classes for it.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Paragraph
|
||
Wpisywanie kodu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX enables you to write code with a layout named
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Scrap
|
||
\noun default
|
||
.
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
The equivalent Noweb term is
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Chunk
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
For historical reasons, I got used to the term
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
scrap
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
introduced by other literate tool named Nuweb, which I used for many years
|
||
before rendering myself to Noweb.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
<<My scrap>>=
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
code
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
more code
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
even more code
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
@
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The problem is that whatever is written in between the << and the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
@
|
||
\family default
|
||
must be taken literally, i.e., LyX should be prevented from making any special
|
||
interpretation of what has been written.
|
||
For that reason, I defined a new layout named Scrap, that works like a
|
||
LaTeX paragraph but has a free spacing capability.
|
||
In other words, it is a combination of the LaTeX and the LyX-Code layouts.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The down side of this
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
semi-hack
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
is that consecutive paragraphs of code will be spaced with one empty line
|
||
in the source code and also in the printed documentation.
|
||
Of course I don't want this.
|
||
The work around is to enter each line of code within a single Scrap, with
|
||
a newline (ctrl-return).
|
||
The example above will look like this:
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
If you have a printed version of this document you will not see any difference
|
||
between the previous example and this one.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
<<My scrap>>=
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
code
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
more code
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
even more code
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
@
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
This layout works fine.
|
||
The only real inconvenience is that you have to type ctrl-return instead
|
||
of a plain return.
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
It is in my list of
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
improvements
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
to fix that.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
e to enter a blank character.
|
||
I believe these problems are a small price to pay for the benefits LyX
|
||
brings to you for typing, compiling, and debugging your literate program.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Paragraph
|
||
Generowanie dokumentacji
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
At this point you already have a new document file with a proper document
|
||
class, and with some code and text on it.
|
||
How do I print it ? The answer is simple, you select ,,Update dvi'' or
|
||
,,Update PostScript'' or ,,View dvi'', etc.
|
||
Just like you would do for a plain document.
|
||
No special procedure is required.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
To help orientate you, I will now explain what happens inside LyX:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
When the ,,Update dvi'' menu option is chosen, a latex file is generated.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
If the document is of any literate class the generated file will be named
|
||
with an extension name defined by
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_extension
|
||
\family default
|
||
, otherwise the file will have the usual
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
extension.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Note that the only difference so far is in the name of the file, no special
|
||
processing is required by LyX.
|
||
Given that you formatted the code using the Scrap layout that, by itself,
|
||
takes care of the business.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
If the document is of any literate class LyX will execute:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_command
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
<
|
||
\emph on
|
||
filename
|
||
\emph default
|
||
>
|
||
\emph on
|
||
filename
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.out
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_error_filter
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
<
|
||
\emph on
|
||
filename
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.out >
|
||
\emph on
|
||
filename
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.log
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Otherwise it will just skip this step.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
Finally, LaTeX is invoked and the regular post processing continues as in
|
||
a plain document.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The purpose of the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
is to transform the newly created
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.nw
|
||
\family default
|
||
file into a
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.tex
|
||
\family default
|
||
file.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The purpose of the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_error_filter
|
||
\family default
|
||
command is to help LyX display error boxes when the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
reports any errors.
|
||
This filter can be a C program, a script, or any thing you want.
|
||
Its job is to identify error messages from your literate tool, in our case
|
||
Noweb, and convert them to a common format that LyX understands.
|
||
A separate document,
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Literate.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
, in the examples directory (accessed with the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Examples
|
||
\family default
|
||
button in the file popup), has a literate C program that can be used to
|
||
parse Noweb error messages.
|
||
This scheme introduces one more command for the user to configure, but
|
||
has the advantage of
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
literate tool
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
independence.
|
||
Moreover, if you don't bother to set it, you can still use the system,
|
||
you just loose the ability to have a nice display and interaction with
|
||
the error messages.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Paragraph
|
||
Generowanie kodu
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
When the ,,Build Program'' File menu option is chosen or the corresponding
|
||
button in the toolbar is pressed, a latex file with extension
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_extension
|
||
\family default
|
||
is generated just like step 1 above.
|
||
Then LyX invokes
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
to generate the code and
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_error_filter
|
||
\family default
|
||
to process the compilation error messages, as in step 3 above.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Note that no special processing is required from LyX.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Also note that I am assuming that you are familiar with Noweb.
|
||
In this case you will know what to do to get an executable file starting
|
||
from a noweb file (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
.nw
|
||
\family default
|
||
extension).
|
||
It is likely that you will create a makefile for that purpose.
|
||
For that reason, after LyX creates the noweb file, it invokes the command
|
||
defined by
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_program
|
||
\family default
|
||
, with a default of
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
make
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
In case you want to process your literate file with a script, or some other
|
||
program, just insert in your lyxrc file an entry with:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_command
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
my_script my_arguments
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_error_filter
|
||
\family default
|
||
differs from the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_error_filter
|
||
\family default
|
||
only in that the former will identify error messages from your compiler.
|
||
The same example program mentioned before can also parse gcc, or xlc error
|
||
messages.
|
||
If you have a different compiler you may want to change this program or
|
||
create a new one.
|
||
Again, the same comments from the previous section are valid here: this
|
||
is optional, you can skip it if you can afford to loose the LyX error handling
|
||
feature.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
In summary, the ,,Build Program'' internal function sequence is pretty much
|
||
like the ,,Update dvi'' one but involving different commands.
|
||
See schematic:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
,,Update dvi'' -> generate .tex
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
-> invoke -> show latex errors
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
on plain doc file
|
||
\backslash
|
||
latex
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
,,Update dvi'' -> generate same -> invoke
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
-> invoke -> show latex errors
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
on literate doc file with .nw
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_command
|
||
\backslash
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
latex
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
extension
|
||
\backslash
|
||
_______ -> show literate errors
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
,,Build Program'' -> generate same -> invoke
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
-> show compilation error
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
on literate doc file with .nw
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_command
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
extension ( make )
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Konfiguracja LyXa
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
There are five new controls that you can put in your lyxrc file:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
specifies which literate tool you are going to use.
|
||
During normal LyX configuration, the auto configuration script will try
|
||
to find the noweb package for you.
|
||
If the search is successful, the default value for this control is set
|
||
to:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
noweave -delay -index
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Otherwise the default value is set to
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
none
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_extension
|
||
\family default
|
||
specifies the filename extension to be used for literate documents.
|
||
Some literate tools requires specific file extension names.
|
||
The default is set during configuration as either
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.nw
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
or
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
none
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, depending on whether the auto configuration found the noweb package or
|
||
not.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_command
|
||
\family default
|
||
defaults to
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
make
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
You need to create a makefile to do the tangling, compilation, etc.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Another way is to maintain the makefile or building script itself as part
|
||
of the document.
|
||
That way every project can be compiled with the same command line:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
notangle -Rbuild-script
|
||
\emph on
|
||
filename
|
||
\emph default
|
||
.nw | sh
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
To use this scheme, create a script named
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
project-build
|
||
\family default
|
||
that executes the command above:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
#!/bin/sh
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
notangle -Rbuild-script $1 | sh
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Finally set LyX to execute the
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
project-build
|
||
\family default
|
||
script:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_command project-build
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Every time you start a new project, define a scrap with name
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
build-script
|
||
\family default
|
||
that will do the compilation for that project.
|
||
Whenever you select
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Build Program
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
, LyX will extract that scrap (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
notangle -Rbuild-script...
|
||
\family default
|
||
) and execute it (
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
...|sh
|
||
\family default
|
||
).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_error_filter
|
||
\family default
|
||
defaults to ,,cat''.
|
||
If you compile the program given in
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Literate_example.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
, you can set:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
literate_error_filter
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
listerrors n
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
to process Noweb(noweave) error messages
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Description
|
||
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_error_filter
|
||
\family default
|
||
defaults to
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
cat
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
If you compile the program given in
|
||
\family typewriter
|
||
Literate_example.lyx
|
||
\family default
|
||
, you can set:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
build_error_filter
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
listerrors b
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
to process both Noweb(notangle) error messages and gcc error messages.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Rozszerzenia diagnostyczne
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
There is also a new function implemented in the LyX server, the ,,server-goto-fi
|
||
le-row'' function, to be used with ddd/gdb or other debugger.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
When debugging code with ddd/gdb, it is possible to invoke a text editor
|
||
at the current execution position with a single key stroke.
|
||
The default ddd configuration for that is shift-ctrl-V.
|
||
It happens that you can define the editor command line invocation in ddd
|
||
by accessing the edit\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
preferences\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
helpers window and changing the ,,Edit
|
||
Sources'' entry.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
I take advantage of the new created LyX server function and this ddd feature,
|
||
and set
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Edit Sources
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
to:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
echo "LYXCMD:monitor:server-goto-file-row:@FILE@ @LINE@" >~/.lyxpipe.in
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
With this, whenever you are using ddd and find a point in the program that
|
||
you want to edit, you just press shift-ctrl-V (in the ddd window), and
|
||
ddd you forward this information to LyX through the LyX server and then
|
||
the LyX window will show the same file with the cursor at the same position
|
||
ddd was pointing to.
|
||
No more guessing or long scrolling to locate a point in the program back
|
||
from debugging !
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Note however that you must enable the LyX server to get this feature working
|
||
(it is disabled by default).
|
||
To enable it, insert in your lyxrc file:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
serverpipe "/home/<your home directory>/.lyxpipe"
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
Read the LyX server documentation for further information.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Rozszerzenia paska narzędzi
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
I created six new buttons that can be added to your LyX toolbar.
|
||
Five of these buttons are short cuts to layout styles: Standard, Section,
|
||
LaTeX, LyX-Code, and Scrap.
|
||
I created those because they are the ones I use most and I was tired of
|
||
scrolling the layout menu looking for the one I wanted.
|
||
The last one is a short cut to the
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Build Program
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
File menu entry.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
LyX has a range of buttons that are available for tool bar customization.
|
||
In my toolbar I like to combine the six short cuts above with two more:
|
||
One for
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Update dvi
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
and the other for
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
View dvi
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
File menu entries.
|
||
Here is how it looks like:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
begin_toolbar
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
layouts
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
add layout Standard
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
add layout Section
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
add layout LaTeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
add layout LyX-Code
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
add layout Scrap
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
separator
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
add buffer-view
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
add buffer-typeset
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
add build-program
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
separator
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
end_toolbar
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
Dopasowanie kolorów
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
There are a number of colors in LyX that can be customized.
|
||
For each one there are two ways to do it: either by inserting a line in
|
||
your X resource files, or by adding a flag in the LyX command line.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
One of the things that bothers people is the LaTeX font color.
|
||
The default color is red, since the scraps uses LaTeX font, and there is
|
||
a lot of scraps in literate documents, you may get tired of seeing everything
|
||
in red.
|
||
Example:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
In the X resource file:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
lyx*LatexColor: gold
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
In the command line:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
lyx -LatexColor gold
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The next thing is the visible presence of the newline character in the screen.
|
||
You can choose the color of this particular character and make it blend
|
||
in the background.
|
||
I recommend you choosing a color that is close to the background but not
|
||
equal, that way you still can see it is there, but it is not bothering
|
||
you anymore.
|
||
Example:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
In the X resource file:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
lyx*BackgroundColor: gray20
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
lyx*NewLineColor: gray35
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
In the command line:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
lyx -BackgroundColor gray20 -NewLineColor gray35
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
If you don't like a bright clear background burning your eyes all day long,
|
||
you can reverse background and foreground colors with this:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
In the X resource file:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
lyx*Reverse: 1
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Itemize
|
||
In the command line:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Quote
|
||
lyx -Reverse 1
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_deeper
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
The problem with all those color alterations is that you may need to change
|
||
other colors as well to ensure that math, inset, etc, are
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
normal
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
with respect to the rest.
|
||
The following is the selection I use in my own X resource file.
|
||
It is just a suggestion.
|
||
I encourage you to try to find the color set that work best for you.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
lyx*Reverse: 1
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
lyx*MathColor: green
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
lyx*LatexColor: gold
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
lyx*OnOffLineColor: magenta
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
lyx*InsetColor: yellow
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
lyx*LightedColor: gray50
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
lyx*NewLineColor: gray35
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout LyX-Code
|
||
lyx*BackgroundColor: gray20
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Chapter
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Special features
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
You can do everything with LyX that you can do with LaTeX.
|
||
However, LyX cannot support every LaTeX feature directly.
|
||
But you can always use TeX Code.
|
||
This chapter shows you some more special things you might want to use.
|
||
For other special things you can do with figures, tables, floats, boxes
|
||
and notes, have a look at the
|
||
\emph on
|
||
EmbeddedObjects
|
||
\emph default
|
||
manual.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Multiple Text Columns
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
This feature is independent of the option
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Two-column document
|
||
\family default
|
||
in the document settings under
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Text Layout
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
If you want to have 2
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
columns for the whole document, it is recommended to use the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Two-column document
|
||
\family default
|
||
option.
|
||
For all other cases use this feature.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
To use multiple text columns in your document, you have to load the module
|
||
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Multiple Columns
|
||
\family default
|
||
(menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Document\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Modules
|
||
\family default
|
||
) and must have the LaTeX-package
|
||
\series bold
|
||
multicol
|
||
\series default
|
||
installed.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Footnotes within multiple columns will be placed at the bottom of the page
|
||
and not under each column.
|
||
Within the different columns you can use everything, with the limitation
|
||
that for floats you need to use the float option
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Span columns
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Basics
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
If you want to have 2
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
columns in your text, insert a multicolumn inset via the menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Custom
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Insets\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Multiple
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Columns
|
||
\family default
|
||
where the columns should start.
|
||
Write all text that should be printed in 2
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
columns into this inset.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Here is an example:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\noindent
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
\noindent
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
The Adventure of the Empty House
|
||
\series default
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
by Sir Arthur Conan Doyle
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
It was in the spring of the year 1894 that all London was interested, and
|
||
the fashionable world dismayed, by the murder of the Honourable Ronald
|
||
Adair under most unusual and inexplicable circumstances.
|
||
The public has already learned those particulars of the crime which came
|
||
out in the police investigation, but a good deal was suppressed upon that
|
||
occasion, since the case for the prosecution was so overwhelmingly strong
|
||
that it was not necessary to bring forward all the facts.
|
||
Only now, at the end of nearly ten years, am I allowed to supply those
|
||
missing links which make up the whole of that remarkable chain.
|
||
The crime was of interest in itself, but that interest was as nothing to
|
||
me compared to the inconceivable sequel, which afforded me the greatest
|
||
shock and surprise of any event in my adventurous life.
|
||
Even now, after this long interval, I find myself thrilling as I think
|
||
of it, and feeling once more that sudden flood of joy, amazement, and increduli
|
||
ty which utterly submerged my mind.
|
||
Let me say to that public, which has shown some interest in those glimpses
|
||
which I have occasionally given them of the thoughts and actions of a very
|
||
remarkable man, that they are not to blame me if I have not shared my knowledge
|
||
with them, for I should have considered it my first duty to do so, had
|
||
I not been barred by a positive prohibition from his own lips, which was
|
||
only withdrawn upon the third of last month.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
To get 3 or more columns, set the cursor into the multicolumn inset and
|
||
use the menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Number
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
of
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Columns
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
The number of the desired columns is written into that inset (for 3
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
columns write
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
3
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
).
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Here is an example with 3
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
columns:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\size footnotesize
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Argument 1
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
3
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
It can be imagined that my close intimacy with Sherlock Holmes had interested
|
||
me deeply in crime, and that after his disappearance I never failed to
|
||
read with care the various problems which came before the public.
|
||
And I even attempted, more than once, for my own private satisfaction,
|
||
to employ his methods in their solution, though with indifferent success.
|
||
There was none, however, which appealed to me like this tragedy of Ronald
|
||
Adair.
|
||
As I read the evidence at the inquest, which led up to a verdict of willful
|
||
murder against some person or persons unknown, I realized more clearly
|
||
than I had ever done the loss which the community had sustained by the
|
||
death of Sherlock Holmes.
|
||
There were points about this strange business which would, I was sure,
|
||
have specially appealed to him, and the efforts of the police would have
|
||
been supplemented, or more probably anticipated, by the trained observation
|
||
and the alert mind of the first criminal agent in Europe.
|
||
All day, as I drove upon my round, I turned over the case in my mind and
|
||
found no explanation which appeared to me to be adequate.
|
||
At the risk of telling a twice-told tale, I will recapitulate the facts
|
||
as they were known to the public at the conclusion of the inquest.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
You can have up to 10
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
columns if you want to, but that might not be very pleasant for the readers
|
||
of your document.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Newpage newpage
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Columns inside Columns
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
You can also have columns inside columns:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\size footnotesize
|
||
\lang english
|
||
The Honourable Ronald Adair was the second son of the Earl of Maynooth,
|
||
at that time governor of one of the Australian colonies.
|
||
Adair's mother had returned from Australia to undergo the operation for
|
||
cataract, and she, her son Ronald, and her daughter Hilda were living together
|
||
at 427 Park Lane.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\size footnotesize
|
||
\lang english
|
||
The youth moved in the best society–had, so far as was known, no enemies
|
||
and no particular vices.
|
||
He had been engaged to Miss Edith Woodley, of Carstairs, but the engagement
|
||
had been broken off by mutual consent some months before, and there was
|
||
no sign that it had left any very profound feeling behind it.
|
||
For the rest {sic} the man's life moved in a narrow and conventional circle,
|
||
for his habits were quiet and his nature unemotional.
|
||
Yet it was upon this easy-going young aristocrat that death came, in most
|
||
strange and unexpected form, between the hours of ten and eleven-twenty
|
||
on the night of March 30, 1894.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\size footnotesize
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Ronald Adair was fond of cards–playing continually, but never for such stakes
|
||
as would hurt him.
|
||
He was a member of the Baldwin, the Cavendish, and the Bagatelle card clubs.
|
||
It was shown that, after dinner on the day of his death, he had played
|
||
a rubber of whist at the latter club.
|
||
He had also played there in the afternoon.
|
||
|
||
\size default
|
||
|
||
\size footnotesize
|
||
The evidence of those who had played with him– Mr.
|
||
Murray, Sir John Hardy, and Colonel Moran–showed that the game was whist,
|
||
and that there was a fairly equal fall of the cards.
|
||
Adair might have lost five pounds, but not more.
|
||
His fortune was a considerable one, and such a loss could not in any way
|
||
affect him.
|
||
He had played nearly every day at one club or other, but he was a cautious
|
||
player, and usually rose a winner.
|
||
It came out in evidence that, in partnership with Colonel Moran, he had
|
||
actually won as much as four hundred and twenty pounds in a sitting, some
|
||
weeks before, from Godfrey Milner and Lord Balmoral.
|
||
So much for his recent history as it came out at the inquest.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Advanced Examples
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
The examples in this section show some more special features of multiple
|
||
columns.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
For more features of multiple columns, have a look at the documentation
|
||
of the LaTeX-package
|
||
\series bold
|
||
multicol
|
||
\series default
|
||
,
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset citation
|
||
LatexCommand cite
|
||
key "multicol"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Preface
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
To add a preface text for multiple columns, set the cursor into the mulitcolumn
|
||
inset and use the menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Preface
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Write your preface text into that inset.
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
This is an example with some preface text:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Argument 2
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
And the story continues and continues and continues and continues\SpecialChar \ldots{}
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
On the evening of the crime, he returned from the club exactly at ten.
|
||
His mother and sister were out spending the evening with a relation.
|
||
The servant deposed that she heard him enter the front room on the second
|
||
floor, generally used as his sitting-room.
|
||
She had lit a fire there, and as it smoked she had opened the window.
|
||
No sound was heard from the room until eleven-twenty, the hour of the return
|
||
of Lady Maynooth and her daughter.
|
||
Desiring to say good-night, she attempted to enter her son's room.
|
||
The door was locked on the inside, and no answer could be got to their
|
||
cries and knocking.
|
||
Help was obtained, and the door forced.
|
||
The unfortunate young man was found lying near the table.
|
||
His head had been horribly mutilated by an expanding revolver bullet, but
|
||
no weapon of any sort was to be found in the room.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
You can also use a section heading as the preface if you use a section command
|
||
as TeX Code.
|
||
For example the command
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
\lang english
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
subsection{subsection title}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
creates a subsection.
|
||
In this example the preface is a subsubsection:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Argument 2
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
subsubsection{
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
This is a subsubsection heading as a preface
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
A minute examination of the circumstances served only to make the case more
|
||
complex.
|
||
In the first place, no reason could be given why the young man should have
|
||
fastened the door upon the inside.
|
||
There was the possibility that the murderer had done this, and had afterwards
|
||
escaped by the window.
|
||
The drop was at least twenty feet, however, and a bed of crocuses in full
|
||
bloom lay beneath.
|
||
Neither the flowers nor the earth showed any sign of having been disturbed,
|
||
nor were there any marks upon the narrow strip of grass which separated
|
||
the house from the road.
|
||
Apparently, therefore, it was the young man himself who had fastened the
|
||
door.
|
||
But how did he come by his death? No one could have climbed up to the window
|
||
without leaving traces.
|
||
Suppose a man had fired through the window, he would indeed be a remarkable
|
||
shot who could with a revolver inflict so deadly a wound.
|
||
Again, Park Lane is a frequented thoroughfare; there is a cab stand within
|
||
a hundred yards of the house.
|
||
No one had heard a shot.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
If there is less vertical space than 6
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
text lines is left on the page at the beginning of the multiple columns,
|
||
a page break will be inserted before the multiple columns.
|
||
Depending on the number of lines of the preface text, you might want to
|
||
change this space.
|
||
This is done by setting the cursor into the mulitcolumn inset behind the
|
||
preface (if there is any) and using the menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Space
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Before
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Page
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Break
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Insert into that inset the amount of space like e.
|
||
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
g.
|
||
\begin_inset space \space{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
5cm
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
In this example the space is set to 7
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
text lines by using
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
7
|
||
\backslash
|
||
baselineskip
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
(where the command
|
||
\series bold
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
baselineskip
|
||
\series default
|
||
needs to be inserted as TeX code):
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Argument 3
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
7
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
baselineskip
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
On the evening of the crime, he returned from the club exactly at ten.
|
||
His mother and sister were out spending the evening with a relation.
|
||
The servant deposed that she heard him enter the front room on the second
|
||
floor, generally used as his sitting-room.
|
||
She had lit a fire there, and as it smoked she had opened the window.
|
||
No sound was heard from the room until eleven-twenty, the hour of the return
|
||
of Lady Maynooth and her daughter.
|
||
Desiring to say good-night, she attempted to enter her son's room.
|
||
The door was locked on the inside, and no answer could be got to their
|
||
cries and knocking.
|
||
Help was obtained, and the door forced.
|
||
The unfortunate young man was found lying near the table.
|
||
His head had been horribly mutilated by an expanding revolver bullet, but
|
||
no weapon of any sort was to be found in the room.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Surrounding Space
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
The amount of space before and after multiple columns can be changed by
|
||
changing the length
|
||
\series bold
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
multicolsep
|
||
\series default
|
||
.
|
||
For example the command
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
\lang english
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
multicolsep}{3cm}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
in TeX Code changes its value to 3
|
||
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
cm.
|
||
The change must be made before the multiple columns' start.
|
||
The predefined value is 13
|
||
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
pt.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
For this example
|
||
\series bold
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
multicolsep
|
||
\series default
|
||
was set to 2.5
|
||
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
cm:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
multicolsep}{2.5cm}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
All day I turned these facts over in my mind, endeavouring to hit upon some
|
||
theory which could reconcile them all, and to find that line of least resistanc
|
||
e which my poor friend had declared to be the starting-point of every investigat
|
||
ion.
|
||
I confess that I made little progress.
|
||
In the evening I strolled across the Park, and found myself about six o'clock
|
||
at the Oxford Street end of Park Lane.
|
||
A group of loafers upon the pavements, all staring up at a particular window,
|
||
directed me to the house which I had come to see.
|
||
A tall, thin man with coloured glasses, whom I strongly suspected of being
|
||
a plain-clothes detective, was pointing out some theory of his own, while
|
||
the others crowded round to listen to what he said.
|
||
I got as near him as I could, but his observations seemed to me to be absurd,
|
||
so I withdrew again in some disgust.
|
||
As I did so I struck against an elderly, deformed man, who had been behind
|
||
me, and I knocked down several books which he was carrying.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Note Greyedout
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Note:
|
||
\series default
|
||
The values you set with
|
||
\series bold
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength
|
||
\series default
|
||
will be used for all following multiple columns until you change them again.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
multicolsep}{13pt}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Note Note
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
go back to the default
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Newpage newpage
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Column Separation
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
The width of the columns is automatically calculated, but you can modify
|
||
the space between the columns.
|
||
This is done by changing the length
|
||
\series bold
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
columnsep
|
||
\series default
|
||
.
|
||
Its predefined value is 10
|
||
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
pt.
|
||
Here is an example where
|
||
\series bold
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
columnsep
|
||
\series default
|
||
is set to 3
|
||
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
cm:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
columnsep}{3cm}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
My observations of No.
|
||
\begin_inset space \space{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
427 Park Lane did little to clear up the problem in which I was interested.
|
||
The house was separated from the street by a low wall and railing, the
|
||
whole not more than five feet high.
|
||
It was perfectly easy, therefore, for anyone to get into the garden, but
|
||
the window was entirely inaccessible, since there was no water pipe or
|
||
anything which could help the most active man to climb it.
|
||
More puzzled than ever, I retraced my steps to Kensington.
|
||
I had not been in my study five minutes when the maid entered to say that
|
||
a person desired to see me.
|
||
To my astonishment it was none other than my strange old book collector,
|
||
his sharp, wizened face peering out from a frame of white hair, and his
|
||
precious volumes, a dozen of them at least, wedged under his right arm.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
columnsep}{10pt}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Note Note
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
go back to the default
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsubsection
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Vertical Lines
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Between the columns a rule with a width of the length
|
||
\series bold
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
columnseprule
|
||
\series default
|
||
is placed.
|
||
If this rule width is set to 0
|
||
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
pt (this is the default), the rule is suppressed.
|
||
In the following example the line is 2
|
||
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
pt wide:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
columnseprule}{2pt}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Flex Multiple Columns
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
You're surprised to see me, sir,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
said he, in a strange, croaking voice.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
I acknowledged that I was.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Well, I've a conscience, sir, and when I chanced to see you go into this
|
||
house, as I came hobbling after you, I thought to myself, I'll just step
|
||
in and see that kind gentleman, and tell him that if I was a bit gruff
|
||
in my manner there was not any harm meant, and that I am much obliged to
|
||
him for picking up my books.
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
You make too much of a trifle,
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
said I.
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
May I ask how you knew who I was?
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\size small
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Well, sir, if it isn't too great a liberty, I am a neighbour of yours, for
|
||
you'll find my little bookshop at the corner of Church Street, and very
|
||
happy to see you, I am sure.
|
||
Maybe you collect yourself, sir.
|
||
Here's
|
||
\noun on
|
||
British
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Birds
|
||
\noun default
|
||
, and
|
||
\noun on
|
||
Catullus
|
||
\noun default
|
||
, and
|
||
\noun on
|
||
The Holy War
|
||
\noun default
|
||
--a bargain, every one of them.
|
||
With five volumes you could just fill that gap on that second shelf.
|
||
It looks untidy, does it not, sir?
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
|
||
\backslash
|
||
setlength{
|
||
\backslash
|
||
columnseprule}{0pt}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\begin_inset Note Note
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
go back to the default
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Newpage newpage
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Section
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Non-standard Paragraph Shapes
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\noindent
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
LaTeX as well as any other text processor uses by default rectangular paragraphs.
|
||
For special cases like for example posters, invitation cards or poems you
|
||
can modify the paragraph shape to one of your choice.
|
||
This can be done by using the LaTeX-package
|
||
\series bold
|
||
shapepar
|
||
\series default
|
||
which is loaded by using in the document settings the module
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Custom paragraph shapes
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Predefined shapes
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
\lang english
|
||
shapepar
|
||
\series default
|
||
provides the following shapes:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Tabular
|
||
<lyxtabular version="3" rows="13" columns="3">
|
||
<features rotate="0" booktabs="true" islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
|
||
<column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="16col%">
|
||
<column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="40col%">
|
||
<column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="35col%">
|
||
<row endhead="true">
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Name
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Description
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Annotation
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
CDlabel
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Circle with circular hole (in the size of a CD/DVD)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Cannot be scaled, take care there is not too much text
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Circle
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Circle
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Fragile, calculation might fail
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Diamond
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Rhomboid (symbolizing a
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
diamond
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
-
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Heart
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Heart-like shape
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
-
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Hexagon
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Hexagon
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
-
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Nut
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Nut for bolt (hexagon with circular hole)
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
-
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Square
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Square
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
-
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Star
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Five-point star
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
-
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Candle
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Burning candle
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
-
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Drop down/up
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Normal/reversed rain drop
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Fragile, calculation might fail
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
TeX
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
The TeX logo
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
-
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
<row>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Triangle up/down/
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
left/right
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Triangles in different orientations
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
<cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
|
||
\begin_inset Text
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
-
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
</cell>
|
||
</row>
|
||
</lyxtabular>
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
To use a shape for your paragraph, simply select it in LyX's pull-down box
|
||
for environments in the toolbar.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Newpage newpage
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Here is an example paragraph in the shape of a nut:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Nut
|
||
|
||
\lang latin
|
||
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consetetur sadipscing elitr, sed diam nonumy
|
||
eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, sed diam
|
||
voluptua.
|
||
At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
|
||
Stet clita kasd gubergren, no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor
|
||
sit amet.
|
||
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consetetur sadipscing elitr, sed diam nonumy
|
||
eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, sed diam
|
||
voluptua.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Note Greyedout
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Note
|
||
\series default
|
||
: shapepar paragraphs cannot run over a page break.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
\lang english
|
||
shapepar
|
||
\series default
|
||
takes care that the shape will always be preserved, no matter how much
|
||
text is in the paragraph.
|
||
Therefore the paragraph size changes with the amount of contained text.
|
||
This can lead to paragraph sizes exceeding the page margins.
|
||
To demonstrate the size scaling, here is the same example paragraph but
|
||
with twice as much text:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Newpage newpage
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Nut
|
||
|
||
\lang latin
|
||
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consetetur sadipscing elitr, sed diam nonumy
|
||
eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, sed diam
|
||
voluptua.
|
||
At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
|
||
Stet clita kasd gubergren, no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor
|
||
sit amet.
|
||
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consetetur sadipscing elitr, sed diam nonumy
|
||
eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, sed diam
|
||
voluptua.
|
||
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consetetur sadipscing elitr, sed diam nonumy
|
||
eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, sed diam
|
||
voluptua.
|
||
At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
|
||
Stet clita kasd gubergren, no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor
|
||
sit amet.
|
||
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consetetur sadipscing elitr, sed diam nonumy
|
||
eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, sed diam
|
||
voluptua.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
An exception is the shape
|
||
\family sans
|
||
CDlabel
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
It cannot be scaled because it must fit the size of a CD/DVD.
|
||
Therefore the amount of text that fits into the shape is limited.
|
||
\begin_inset Newline newline
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
The
|
||
\family sans
|
||
drop
|
||
\family default
|
||
shapes and the
|
||
\family sans
|
||
circle
|
||
\family default
|
||
shape are fragile, meaning that the calculation of their size can fail,
|
||
depending on the amount of text.
|
||
You will then get the LaTeX error
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes eld
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Arithmetic overflow
|
||
\begin_inset Quotes erd
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
In this case one can try to remove or add some text; if nothing works one
|
||
has to use another shape.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
For shapes with tips you will maybe see that LaTeX's hyphenation routine
|
||
fails for text in the tips.
|
||
Therefore it is often necessary to add hyphenation points
|
||
\family sans
|
||
(
|
||
\begin_inset Info
|
||
type "shortcut"
|
||
arg "specialchar-insert hyphenation"
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\family default
|
||
) to the corresponding text parts.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Shapepar paragraphs are either always centered or placed on the page so
|
||
that their left border touches the left page margin.
|
||
You can therefore not use the paragraph dialog to align such paragraphs.
|
||
A solution is to put the paragraph into a minipage or parbox and align
|
||
the box.
|
||
The problem is hereby to find the right width for the box.
|
||
Because if it is too wide and you center the box, the paragraph is not
|
||
centered too because it sticks at the left side of the box.
|
||
So you might have to play a bit with the width until it fits.
|
||
Here are two heart-shaped paragraphs, the first one is not aligned, the
|
||
second one is right-aligned:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Newpage newpage
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Heart
|
||
\noindent
|
||
|
||
\lang latin
|
||
Lo\SpecialChar \-
|
||
rem ipsum dolor sit amet, consetetur sadipscing elitr, sed diam nonumy
|
||
eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, sed diam
|
||
voluptua.
|
||
At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
|
||
Stet clita kasd gubergren, no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor
|
||
sit amet.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
\noindent
|
||
\align right
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Box Frameless
|
||
position "t"
|
||
hor_pos "c"
|
||
has_inner_box 1
|
||
inner_pos "t"
|
||
use_parbox 1
|
||
use_makebox 0
|
||
width "42col%"
|
||
special "none"
|
||
height "1in"
|
||
height_special "totalheight"
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Heart
|
||
\noindent
|
||
|
||
\lang latin
|
||
Lo\SpecialChar \-
|
||
rem ipsum dolor sit amet, consetetur sadipscing elitr, sed diam nonumy
|
||
eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, sed diam
|
||
voluptua.
|
||
At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
|
||
Stet clita kasd gubergren, no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor
|
||
sit amet.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Subsection
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Custom shapes
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
You can define any shape you want.
|
||
Doing this manually is a lot of work because every coordinate must be specified.
|
||
But there is a way to let the computer calculate the coordinates:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Install the program
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset href
|
||
LatexCommand href
|
||
name "Jpgfdraw"
|
||
target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/graphics/jpgfdraw"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
In
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Jpgfdraw
|
||
\family default
|
||
go to the menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Te
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
X/LaT
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
eX\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Settings\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Set Normal Size
|
||
\family default
|
||
and select the font size you are using in your document.
|
||
For example this document uses the size 12
|
||
\begin_inset space \thinspace{}
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
pt.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Draw a shape.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Use the menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Te
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
X/LaT
|
||
\begin_inset ERT
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
{}
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
eX\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Shapepar
|
||
\family default
|
||
to export the shape to coordinates.
|
||
In the appearing dialog use either the outline of your shape for the coordinate
|
||
s or the path itself.
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
For more information see
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset href
|
||
LatexCommand href
|
||
target "http://www.dickimaw-books.com/apps/jpgfdraw/manual/shapepar.html"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
The coordinates are written into a TeX-file.
|
||
To use it for your LyX document
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Place the cursor before the first character of your paragraph (or into a
|
||
new empty one).
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Enumerate
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Open in LyX the menu
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Insert\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
File\SpecialChar \menuseparator
|
||
Child
|
||
\begin_inset space ~
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Document
|
||
\family default
|
||
, select the file and use
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Input
|
||
\family default
|
||
as
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Include Type.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace defskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset Note Greyedout
|
||
status open
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Note
|
||
\series default
|
||
: The changed shape only applies to the current paragraph; everything is
|
||
reset to normal for the next paragraph.
|
||
Therefore the shape definition file must be input into every paragraph
|
||
with the desired shape.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
Here is an example:
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset include
|
||
LatexCommand input
|
||
filename "../SpecialParagraphShape.tex"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\lang latin
|
||
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consetetur sadipscing elitr, sed diam nonumy
|
||
eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, sed diam
|
||
voluptua.
|
||
At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum.
|
||
Stet clita kasd gubergren, no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum dolor
|
||
sit amet.
|
||
Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet, consetetur sadipscing elitr, sed diam nonumy
|
||
eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna aliquyam erat, sed diam
|
||
voluptua.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\series bold
|
||
\lang english
|
||
A tip:
|
||
\series default
|
||
to draw complexer shapes in
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Jpgfdraw
|
||
\family default
|
||
you can draw the shape in a program of your choice and import the resulting
|
||
image to
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Jpgfdraw
|
||
\family default
|
||
.
|
||
Then you only need to draw a line or spline along the outline of the image.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset VSpace bigskip
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Standard
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
The module
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Custom paragraph shapes
|
||
\family default
|
||
also provides the two commands
|
||
\family sans
|
||
shapepar
|
||
\family default
|
||
and
|
||
\family sans
|
||
Shapepar
|
||
\family default
|
||
which can be used to define custom shapes coordinate by coordinate.
|
||
\begin_inset Foot
|
||
status collapsed
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Plain Layout
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
These commands are internally used for all shapes described here.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
For information how these styles are used and about further customization
|
||
possibilities, have a look at the documentation of the package
|
||
\series bold
|
||
shapepar
|
||
\series default
|
||
,
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset citation
|
||
LatexCommand cite
|
||
key "shapepar"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
.
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Bibliography
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
|
||
LatexCommand bibitem
|
||
key "multicol"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Documentation of the LaTeX-package
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset href
|
||
LatexCommand href
|
||
name "multicol"
|
||
target "http://mirror.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/tools/multicol.pdf"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\begin_layout Bibliography
|
||
|
||
\lang english
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
|
||
LatexCommand bibitem
|
||
key "shapepar"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
Documentation of the LaTeX-package
|
||
\begin_inset CommandInset href
|
||
LatexCommand href
|
||
name "shapepar"
|
||
target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/shapepar/shapepar.pdf"
|
||
|
||
\end_inset
|
||
|
||
|
||
\end_layout
|
||
|
||
\end_body
|
||
\end_document
|